User guide | Atlas DD6 Webcam User Manual

User Guide
User Guide Cover
Copyright and Trademark
© 2004-2006 palmOne, Inc. All rights reserved.
palmOne, the palmOne logo, Zire, the Zire logo, “Z” (Stylized) and stylizations and design marks associated
with all the preceding, and trade dress associated with palmOne, Inc.’s products, are among the trademarks
or registered trademarks owned by or licensed to palmOne, Inc. or its subsidiaries. Palm OS, the Palm logo,
Graffiti, HotSync, Palm, Palm Reader, the HotSync logo and the Palm and PalmSource trade dress are
trademarks owned by or licensed to PalmSource, Inc. palmOne, Inc. uses the MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding
technology trademarks under express license from Thomson Licensing S.A. All other brand and product
names are or may be trademarks of, and are used to identify products or services of, their respective owners.
This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without
a license from Microsoft Licensing, GP.
Disclaimer and Limitation of Liability
palmOne, Inc. assumes no responsibility for any damage or loss resulting from the use of this guide.
palmOne, Inc. assumes no responsibility for any loss or claims by third parties which may arise through the
use of this software. palmOne, Inc. assumes no responsibility for any damage or loss caused by deletion of
data as a result of malfunction, dead battery, or repairs. Be sure to make backup copies of all important data
on other media to protect against data loss.
[ ! ] IMPORTANT Please read the End User Software License Agreement with this product before using the
accompanying software program(s). Using any part of the software indicates that you accept the terms of the
End User Software License Agreement.
Software Download Available
Palm® Desktop software is supplied on a CD. If you do not have access to a CD drive for your computer, you
can download Palm Desktop software from www.palmOne.com/support/intl.
v. 1.1
Zire™ 31 Handheld
ii
Table of Contents
About This Guide .................................................................xiv
What’s in this guide? .................................................................................xiv
Step-by-step instructions................................................................... xiv
Links...................................................................................................... xv
Sidebars .......................................................................................................xv
Tips for viewing this guide in Adobe Acrobat Reader ............................xvi
Chapter 1: Setting Up Your Handheld
and Your Computer ..................................................................1
What’s in the box? ........................................................................................2
System requirements ...................................................................................2
Step 1: Charging your handheld..................................................................4
What you should know about your handheld’s battery..................... 5
Step 2: Turning on your handheld for the first time ..................................6
Step 3: Installing your software...................................................................7
Step 4: Connecting your handheld to your computer ...............................8
Switching to another desktop software application ................................10
Using Profiles ..............................................................................................11
Creating a user profile .........................................................................12
Synchronizing with a user profile ......................................................14
Related topics..............................................................................................17
Chapter 2: Exploring Your Handheld....................................18
Locating the controls on your handheld ...................................................19
Front panel controls ............................................................................ 19
Top panel controls............................................................................... 20
Side and back panel controls ............................................................. 21
What’s on the screen? ................................................................................22
Input area ............................................................................................. 22
Application controls ............................................................................ 23
Zire™ 31 Handheld
iii
What software is on my handheld?...........................................................25
What’s on the CD? ......................................................................................26
Related topics ..............................................................................................28
Chapter 3: Moving Around in Applications.........................29
Opening applications..................................................................................30
Using the application buttons ............................................................ 30
Using the Home screen....................................................................... 30
Switching between applications ........................................................ 31
Using menus ..............................................................................................31
Using the Command stroke................................................................ 32
Using the 5-way navigator .........................................................................33
Moving around the Home screen ...................................................... 34
Moving around list screens ................................................................ 35
Moving around record screens .......................................................... 35
Moving around dialog boxes ............................................................. 36
Moving around pick lists..................................................................... 37
Finding information ...................................................................................38
Related topics ..............................................................................................39
Chapter 4: Entering Information...........................................40
How can I enter information? ....................................................................41
Entering information with Graffiti 2 writing .............................................41
Writing Graffiti 2 characters ...............................................................42
Graffiti 2 alphabet................................................................................ 44
Graffiti 2 numbers ............................................................................... 45
Writing Graffiti 2 symbols and other special characters ..................50
Writing Graffiti 2 ShortCuts ................................................................52
Entering information with the onscreen keyboard ..................................54
Entering information with your computer ................................................56
Importing information from other applications .......................................60
Restoring archived items on your computer ............................................62
Entering info from Contacts into another application .............................63
Editing information .....................................................................................65
Selecting information.......................................................................... 65
Zire™ 31 Handheld
iv
Copying and pasting information ......................................................66
Deleting information ...........................................................................67
Related topics ..............................................................................................68
Chapter 5: Synchronizing Your Handheld
with Your Computer ...............................................................69
Why synchronize information? ..................................................................70
What information is synchronized?...........................................................71
How do I synchronize? ..............................................................................72
Synchronizing with a cable .................................................................73
Synchronizing using the IR port .........................................................74
Synchronizing over a network ............................................................78
Synchronizing by dialing in to a network ..........................................78
Synchronizing by connecting to a computer on the network ..........83
Customizing your synchronization settings .............................................86
Choosing how your computer responds to
synchronization requests .............................................................86
Setting synchronization options ........................................................88
Choosing whether application information is updated ....................89
Synchronizing with an external file...........................................................95
Related topics ..............................................................................................96
Chapter 6: Expanding Your Handheld..................................97
What type of expansion cards can I use? .................................................98
How can expansion cards help me?..........................................................98
Inserting an expansion card ......................................................................99
Removing an expansion card .................................................................100
Opening an application on an expansion card ......................................101
Opening files on an expansion card .......................................................102
Viewing card information.........................................................................103
Renaming a card ......................................................................................104
Copying applications to an expansion card ..........................................105
Removing all information from a card ...................................................106
Related topics ............................................................................................107
Zire™ 31 Handheld
v
Chapter 7: Managing Your Contacts ..................................108
Adding a contact ......................................................................................109
Entering additional contact information ..........................................112
Selecting contact field types .............................................................113
Defining custom fields ......................................................................114
Selecting a contact as your business card ......................................115
Copying contact information into multiple contacts ............................116
Locating a contact on your list ................................................................117
Deleting a contact ....................................................................................118
Customizing the Contacts list .................................................................119
Working with Contacts on your computer..............................................121
Related topics ............................................................................................122
Chapter 8: Managing Your Calendar ..................................123
Scheduling events ....................................................................................124
Scheduling an appointment .............................................................124
Scheduling an event without a start time .......................................126
Scheduling a repeating event—standard interval ..........................128
Scheduling a repeating event—unusual interval ............................129
Scheduling an event that is longer than a day ...............................131
Entering a location or a note for an event .......................................132
Color-coding your schedule .....................................................................133
Selecting your color-codes ...............................................................133
Assigning a color-code to an event .................................................136
Setting an alarm .......................................................................................137
Rescheduling an event ............................................................................138
Deleting events .........................................................................................140
Deleting a specific event ...................................................................140
Deleting all your old events ..............................................................142
Checking your schedule ...........................................................................143
Viewing your appointments and tasks together .............................143
Viewing your daily schedule ............................................................145
Viewing your weekly schedule .........................................................147
Viewing your monthly schedule ......................................................148
Finding events that overlap .............................................................. 149
Zire™ 31 Handheld
vi
Customizing your calendar ......................................................................149
Customizing display options for your calendar ..............................150
Setting alarm and time options ........................................................153
Working with Calendar on your computer .............................................155
Related topics ............................................................................................156
Chapter 9: Managing Your Tasks ........................................157
Creating a task ..........................................................................................158
Setting an alarm ................................................................................159
Scheduling a repeating task—standard interval .............................160
Scheduling a repeating task—unusual interval ..............................162
Organizing your tasks ..............................................................................164
Marking a task complete .........................................................................165
Deleting tasks ...........................................................................................166
Deleting a specific task ......................................................................166
Deleting all your completed tasks ....................................................167
Customizing your Tasks list ....................................................................168
Working with Tasks on your computer ...................................................170
Related topics ............................................................................................171
Chapter 10: Writing Memos................................................172
Creating a memo .....................................................................................173
Viewing and editing a memo ..................................................................174
Moving memos in your memos list .......................................................175
Deleting a memo ......................................................................................176
Working with Memos on your computer................................................177
Related topics ............................................................................................178
Chapter 11: Writing Notes in Note Pad..............................179
Creating a note .........................................................................................180
Choosing the pen and paper (background) colors .........................181
Setting an alarm ................................................................................183
Viewing and editing a note .....................................................................185
Deleting a note .........................................................................................186
Zire™ 31 Handheld
vii
Working with Note Pad on your computer .............................................187
Related topics ............................................................................................188
Chapter 12: Performing Calculations .................................189
Calculator buttons.....................................................................................190
Viewing recent calculations ....................................................................191
Related topics ............................................................................................192
Chapter 13: Managing Your Expenses ...............................193
Adding an expense ...................................................................................194
Choosing currency options ......................................................................196
Customizing the currency pick list ...................................................196
Presetting the currency symbol .......................................................197
Creating a currency symbol ..............................................................198
Deleting expenses.....................................................................................200
Deleting an individual expense ........................................................200
Deleting an entire category of expenses .........................................201
Customizing the expense list ...................................................................202
Working with Expense on your computer ..............................................203
Related topics ............................................................................................204
Chapter 14: Listening to Music...........................................205
Transferring MP3 files to an expansion card .........................................206
Transferring music from a CD to an expansion card ............................209
Playing music on your handheld ............................................................213
Managing playlists....................................................................................214
Creating a playlist ..............................................................................214
Playing songs from a playlist ...........................................................216
Editing a playlist ................................................................................217
Deleting a playlist ..............................................................................219
Viewing song info ....................................................................................220
Working with RealOne Player on your computer ..................................221
Related topics ............................................................................................222
Zire™ 31 Handheld
viii
Chapter 15: Viewing Photos ...............................................223
Copying photos to your handheld ..........................................................224
Viewing photos .........................................................................................226
Viewing a photo in Thumbnail view ................................................226
Viewing a photo in List view ............................................................227
Viewing a slide show ........................................................................228
Rotating a photo ................................................................................229
Viewing and editing photo details ...................................................231
Organizing photos ....................................................................................233
Organizing photos in albums ...........................................................233
Moving a photo within and between albums .................................235
Sorting photos in List view ...............................................................236
Copying a photo .......................................................................................237
Working with Photos on your computer.................................................239
Related topics ............................................................................................240
Chapter 16: Sharing Information........................................241
Beaming ....................................................................................................242
Beaming information from within an application ..........................242
Beaming a category ..........................................................................244
Beaming an application ....................................................................245
Other ways of sharing information .........................................................247
Related topics ............................................................................................248
Chapter 17: Keeping Your Information Private..................249
Choosing a security level .........................................................................250
Marking information as private ...............................................................251
Setting the level of privacy ......................................................................252
Hiding or masking private entries ....................................................252
Viewing an entry that is masked ...................................................... 253
Using a password .....................................................................................253
Creating a password .........................................................................254
Changing a password .......................................................................255
Deleting a password.......................................................................... 257
Deleting a forgotten password .........................................................258
Zire™ 31 Handheld
ix
Locking your handheld.............................................................................259
Locking your handheld automatically .............................................260
Locking your handheld manually .....................................................262
Related topics ............................................................................................263
Chapter 18: Using Categories to Organize Information ...264
Adding a category.....................................................................................265
Renaming a category ...............................................................................266
Deleting a category ..................................................................................267
Placing information into a category ........................................................268
Placing an entry into a category .......................................................268
Placing an application into a category .............................................270
Viewing information by category ...........................................................271
Related topics ............................................................................................272
Chapter 19: Installing and Removing Applications ..........273
Checking space and version numbers ...................................................274
Installing the additional software from the CD .....................................276
Installing other applications and files .....................................................278
Installing applications and files on a Windows computer ............. 278
Using the Palm Quick Install icon ....................................................279
Using the Palm Quick Install window ..............................................280
Installing applications and files on a Mac computer ......................281
Using the Send To Handheld droplet .............................................. 281
Using commands in the HotSync menu ..........................................282
Removing an application from your handheld .....................................284
Removing Palm Desktop software from your computer ......................285
Related topics ............................................................................................288
Chapter 20: Customizing Your Handheld ..........................289
Customizing the Home screen ................................................................290
Making the screen easier to read ............................................................292
Changing the screen fonts ................................................................292
Adjusting the brightness and contrast ............................................294
Changing screen colors ....................................................................295
Zire™ 31 Handheld
x
Giving your favorite applications a button or icon ...............................296
Setting the date and time ........................................................................298
Selecting a location ...........................................................................298
Resetting the date and time ..............................................................300
Selecting formats for dates, times, and numbers ..........................302
Customizing the way you enter information ..........................................304
Choosing the input area ....................................................................304
Using the full-screen writing area ....................................................305
Customizing Graffiti 2 strokes ..........................................................306
Setting up ShortCuts .........................................................................307
Changing ShortCuts ..........................................................................309
Correcting problems with tapping ...................................................310
Selecting sound settings .........................................................................311
Entering your owner information ...........................................................312
Conserving battery power .......................................................................313
Preventing your handheld from turning on by accident ................313
Selecting power-saving settings ......................................................314
Connecting your handheld to other devices ..........................................316
Changing the preset connection settings ........................................316
Creating your own connection settings ...........................................318
Customizing network settings .................................................................321
Setting up a service profile ...............................................................321
Connecting to your service ...............................................................324
Adding details to a service profile ...................................................325
Deleting a service profile ..................................................................327
Creating login scripts ........................................................................328
Adding plug-in applications .............................................................331
Related topics ............................................................................................333
Chapter 21: Managing Clock Settings ...............................334
Checking the current date and time ........................................................335
Setting the primary location ....................................................................336
Setting the date and time for the primary location ........................337
Choosing secondary locations for other time zones .............................339
Zire™ 31 Handheld
xi
Modifying the locations list......................................................................340
Adding new locations .......................................................................340
Deleting a location .............................................................................342
Setting the alarm clock .............................................................................343
Responding to the alarm clock......................................................... 344
Changing the clock display ......................................................................345
Related topics ............................................................................................346
Chapter 22: Maintaining Your Handheld ..........................347
Handheld do’s and don’ts ........................................................................347
Handheld do’s.................................................................................... 347
Handheld don’ts ................................................................................ 348
Resetting your handheld ..........................................................................348
Doing a soft reset .............................................................................. 348
Doing a hard reset ............................................................................. 350
Restoring your information after a hard reset........................................351
Related topics ............................................................................................353
Chapter 23: Common Questions .......................................354
Setup..........................................................................................................354
Handheld ...................................................................................................356
Moving around..........................................................................................358
Entering information ................................................................................359
Synchronizing ...........................................................................................361
Calendar.....................................................................................................367
Memos .......................................................................................................367
Notes ..........................................................................................................368
Photos ........................................................................................................368
RealOne .....................................................................................................368
Tasks ..........................................................................................................369
Privacy .......................................................................................................369
Sharing ......................................................................................................370
Problems with incompatible applications ..............................................371
Zire™ 31 Handheld
xii
Chapter 24: Getting Help ...................................................374
Self-help resources ...................................................................................374
Technical support .....................................................................................375
Product Regulatory Information .........................................376
Index ......................................................................................381
Zire™ 31 Handheld
xiii
About This Guide
This guide tells you everything you need to know about your handheld: the things
you’ll do every day, the advanced features that let you get the most out of your
handheld, and the things that make your handheld not only useful, but fun.
What’s in this guide?
The info in this guide includes step-by-step instructions, links to cross-references, and sidebars.
Step-by-step instructions
Here you’ll find how-to information. Look for these cues in instructions:
Continued
Done
Cue that signals the end of the procedure. You're done.
[ ! ] IMPORTANT
A step that you must follow; otherwise, you could experience an
error or even lose information.
[ & ] OPTIONAL
A step you might find useful.
NOTE
WINDOWS ONLY
MAC ONLY
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Cue that means the procedure continues on the next page.
Information that applies only in certain cases or that tells more about
a procedure step.
A procedure or text that applies to one platform only. In most cases,
if you see one heading, check the following or preceding sections for
the other. Sometimes, there is no Mac counterpart for a Windows
procedure or text—this feature is not available to Mac users.
xiv
Links
Links appear as underlined words in sidebars and other places throughout this guide.
In this chapter
Links on the first page of each chapter that send you to a specific section.
Related topics
Links that send you to other topics in this guide to learn about more
things you can do with an application or feature.
Sidebars
[ ! ] Before You Begin
Things you must complete before you can do the steps described in a procedure or group of
procedures.
Tip
A suggestion on how to use a feature more fully; a shortcut; a pointer to a related feature.
Did You Know?
An interesting fact about the topic being described; may include a link to more information.
»
Key Term
A technical term related to the topic being described. The term may appear in this guide or only
on your handheld.
My Handheld
A pointer to a web site where you can obtain general information about your handheld and
learn the latest tips, tricks, and more.
Support
A pointer to a web site where you can find help if you experience problems with a specific
feature or with your handheld.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
xv
Tips for viewing this guide in Adobe Acrobat Reader
Here are some helpful tips for making it easier to read and find information in this guide in
Acrobat Reader:
NOTE If you do not have Acrobat Reader on your computer, you can download it for free from
www.adobe.com.
• To magnify the page, click the magnifying glass
, move the cursor (which is now a
magnifying glass) over the page, and click repeatedly. Click Previous View ( or
depending
on your version of Acrobat Reader) to return to the original view.
• Click an entry in the Table of Contents or Index to go directly to that section of the guide.
• If you link to a page in the guide, to return to the page you were on before you clicked the link,
click Previous View ( or
depending on your version of Acrobat Reader).
• When selecting the page(s) to print, be sure to use the file page number shown at the bottom of
your computer screen, not the printed page number. For example, to print the page you are
reading right now, select page 16 (the file page), not page xvi (the printed page).
Zire™ 31 Handheld
xvi
CHAPTER 1
Setting Up
Your Handheld and Your Computer
In this chapter
What’s in the box?
System requirements
Step 1: Charging your
handheld
Step 2: Turning on your
handheld for the first time
Step 3: Installing your
software
Step 4: Connecting your
handheld to your computer
Switching to another
desktop software application
Using Profiles
Congratulations on the purchase of
your new palmOne™ Zire™ 31
handheld! You’re about to discover so
many things about your handheld that
will help you better organize your life
and have fun, too. As you become
more familiar with your handheld,
you’ll probably personalize the settings
and add applications to make it
uniquely yours.
Benefits of setup
While you’re likely to get years of
enjoyment from your handheld, it only
takes four easy steps to get up and
running.
• Start using your handheld right away
• Establish a link between your
handheld and your computer
• Set up your handheld for optimal use
Related topics
Zire™ 31 Handheld
1
CHAPTER 1
Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer
What’s in the box?
»
Key Term
Palm Desktop software
The software that lets you
enter, update, review, and
synchronize information
on your computer.
HotSync® cable
Power adapter
palmOne Zire 31 handheld
Software installation CD
System requirements
The installation CD contains Palm® Desktop software and other applications you need to set up
and use your handheld. Palm Desktop software lets you easily manage your information at your
computer. To use Palm Desktop software, your desktop computer must meet these requirements:
WINDOWS ONLY
• A PC with a Pentium processor and one of the following operating systems:
• Windows 98
• Windows ME
• Windows 2000 (requires administrator rights to install Palm Desktop software)
• Windows XP (requires administrator rights to install Palm Desktop software)
• Internet Explorer 4.01 with SP2 (Service Pack 2) or later
• 60 megabytes (MB) available hard disk space
Zire™ 31 Handheld
2
CHAPTER 1
Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer
• VGA monitor or better
• One available USB port
• CD or DVD drive for installing Palm Desktop software from the CD that came with your
handheld; or, you can download Palm Desktop software by visiting our web site at
www.palmOne.com/support/intl
NOTE Palm Desktop software that is downloaded from the palmOne web site does not include
additional software available on the CD.
MAC ONLY
• Mac computer or compatible with a PowerPC processor
• Mac OS 9.2.2 or Mac OS X, version 10.2 or 10.3
(Mac OS X requires administrator rights to install Palm Desktop software.)
• 25MB available hard disk space
• Monitor that supports screen resolution of 800 X 600 or better
• One available USB port
• CD or DVD drive for installing Palm Desktop software from the CD that came with your
handheld; or, you can download Palm Desktop software by visiting our web site at
www.palmOne.com/support/intl
NOTE Palm Desktop software that is downloaded from the palmOne web site does not include
additional software available on the CD.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
3
CHAPTER 1
Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer
Step 1: Charging your handheld
[ ! ] Before You Begin
If you’re upgrading from
another Palm OS®
handheld, synchronize
your old handheld with
your old desktop
software.
0
1
Plug the power adapter into your
new handheld and into an outlet.
Do not connect the HotSync
cable to your handheld until
later.
Tip
After the initial charge,
charge your handheld at
least half an hour every
day.
2
Charge your handheld for four hours. Be sure your handheld is fully charged
before going on to Step 2.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
4
CHAPTER 1
Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer
What you should know about your handheld’s battery
While your handheld is charging, take a minute to learn about the battery:
• If you see an alert on the screen warning you that the battery is low, synchronize to back up your
information; then recharge your handheld. This helps prevent accidental loss of information.
• If the battery gets so low that your handheld doesn’t operate, it will store your information for
about a week. In this case, there is enough power to store your information, but not to turn on
your handheld. If your handheld doesn’t turn on when you press the power button, recharge it
immediately for at least three hours.
• Conserve battery life by doing any of the following:
• Adjusting the screen brightness
• Reducing the Auto-off setting
• Preventing your handheld from turning on by accident
• Minimizing use of the expansion slot
[ ! ] IMPORTANT If your battery drains and you don’t recharge it for an extended period of time,
you can lose all the information on your handheld. If this happens, recharge your handheld, and
then synchronize it with your computer. All of the applications and information from your last
synchronization are transferred to your handheld.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
5
CHAPTER 1
Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer
Step 2: Turning on your handheld for the first time
[ ! ] Before You Begin
Be sure to fully charge
your handheld, as
described in Step 1.
0
1
Press the power button to turn
it on.
Stylus
Tip
After you set up your
handheld, go to the Quick
Tour to learn the basics.
Power button
2
[ & ] OPTIONAL
3
Slide the stylus out of the slot.
4
Unplug the power adapter from your handheld.
Hold the stylus as you would hold a pen, and follow the onscreen instructions
to set up your handheld.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
6
CHAPTER 1
Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer
Step 3: Installing your software
[ ! ] Before You Begin
Set up a profile if you
want to install the same
set of information on
several handhelds.
Did You Know?
When you upgrade,
there’s no need to delete
the old desktop software
first. When you install the
new Palm Desktop
software, all of your
information transfers
automatically to the new
software.
Tip
Take the interactive
tutorial on the CD to learn
how to create an
appointment, set up your
handheld’s features for
photos and music, and
more.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
0
1
Insert the CD into your computer.
NOTE You need administrator rights to install Palm Desktop software on a
computer running Windows 2000/XP or Mac OS X.
2
WINDOWS ONLY
Follow the onscreen instructions. If you’re upgrading, select the username that
you assigned to your old handheld.
MAC ONLY
a. Double-click the CD icon, and then double-click the Palm Desktop Installer
icon.
b. Follow the onscreen instructions. If you’re upgrading, select the username
that you assigned to your old handheld.
Done
During installation, you’re asked to connect your computer to your
handheld. See Step 4.
7
CHAPTER 1
Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer
Step 4: Connecting your handheld to your computer
In this step, you connect your handheld to your computer and synchronize for the first time.
Synchronizing simply means that any information you enter in one place (your handheld or
computer) is automatically updated in the other.
[ ! ] IMPORTANT Be sure to synchronize your information at least once a day so that you always
have an up-to-date backup copy of important information.
Tip
If the Select User dialog
box appears during
synchronization, select the
username of the handheld
you want to synchronize,
and click OK.
»
Key Term
Third-party application
A software program that
runs on a Palm OS
handheld, but is not
created or supported by
palmOne, Inc.
Tip
If you have problems with
your new handheld after
you synchronize, you may
need to update your thirdparty applications.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
0
1
Connect your handheld to your
computer:
a. Plug the HotSync cable into a
USB port on your computer.
b. Plug the cable into your
handheld.
Continued
8
CHAPTER 1
Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer
2
3
Press the power button to turn on your handheld.
Continue with the onscreen instructions on your computer to synchronize your
handheld with your computer.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
9
CHAPTER 1
Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer
Switching to another desktop software application
WINDOWS ONLY
[ ! ] Before You Begin
Synchronize your
handheld with your current
desktop software before
switching to a new
software application. This
ensures that your new
desktop software receives
the most current
information.
During CD installation, you chose a desktop software application to synchronize with your
handheld. You may have chosen Palm Desktop software at that time. But if Microsoft Outlook
already contains all of your contacts, appointments, tasks, and notes, you can change your
synchronization method so that your handheld synchronizes with Outlook instead. You can also
change from Outlook to Palm Desktop software.
NOTE If you choose to synchronize with Microsoft Outlook (Windows only), information from
Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and Memos is synchronized with Outlook. Other information, such as
photos and notes, is synchronized with Palm Desktop software.
0
1
Insert the CD into your computer.
2
Select Change your synchronization method.
3
Follow the onscreen instructions for the desktop software you want to use.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
10
CHAPTER 1
Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer
Using Profiles
Suppose your sales organization wants to distribute two dozen handhelds that all have a common
company phone list, a set of memos, and several key applications. A user profile can be created to
install this information before the handhelds are distributed to employees. When the employees
synchronize for the first time, this common information becomes part of their user-specific
information.
A user profile enables you to install the same information onto multiple Palm OS handhelds
before each handheld is individualized with a unique username and user-specific information. A
handheld that has a user profile installed can be given to anyone, because the handheld is not yet
identified by a unique username. When the new user synchronizes for the first time, he or she
gives the handheld a unique username.
NOTE Handhelds that are synchronized with a user profile must be either new ones that have
never been synchronized or handhelds that have had their usernames and information removed
by a hard reset.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
11
CHAPTER 1
Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer
Creating a user profile
WINDOWS ONLY
Did You Know?
Save time by using the
File Link feature or
importing to quickly add
information to a profile.
0
1
Open the New Profile screen:
a. Open Palm Desktop software.
b. From the Tools menu, select Users.
c. Click Profiles, and then click New.
2
3
Enter a unique name for the profile, and click OK twice.
Select the profile from the User
list, and create the info in
Palm Desktop software for the
profile.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
12
CHAPTER 1
Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer
MAC ONLY
0
1
Open the New Profile screen:
a. Open Palm Desktop software.
b. From the User pop-up menu, select Edit Users.
c. Click New Profile.
2
Create the profile:
a. Enter a unique name for the profile, and click OK.
b. Close the Users window.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
13
CHAPTER 1
Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer
3
4
Select the profile from the User pop-up menu, and create the info in
Palm Desktop software for the profile.
Set the profile’s conduit settings:
a. From the HotSync menu, select Conduit Settings.
b. Select the conduit settings for the profile.
Done
Synchronizing with a user profile
WINDOWS ONLY
0
1
Begin synchronization:
a. Connect the HotSync cable to the USB port on your computer, and then
insert the other end into the mini-USB connector on your handheld.
b. Make sure your handheld is on.
c. Tap HotSync
.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
14
CHAPTER 1
Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer
2
Transfer the profile information:
a. Click Profiles.
b. Select the profile you want to
load on the handheld, and
click OK.
c. Click Yes.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
The next time you synchronize that handheld, Palm Desktop
software prompts you to assign a username to the handheld.
15
CHAPTER 1
Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer
MAC ONLY
0
1
Begin synchronization:
a. Connect the HotSync cable to the USB port on your computer, and then
insert the other end into the mini-USB connector on your handheld.
b. Make sure your handheld is on.
c. Tap HotSync
2
Select the profile you want to
load on the handheld, and
click OK.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
.
The next time you synchronize that handheld, Palm Desktop
software prompts you to assign a username to the handheld.
16
CHAPTER 1
Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer
Related topics
My Handheld
Make your handheld
uniquely yours. For great
tips, software, accessories,
and more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
myzire31.
Support
If you’re having problems
with setup or anything else
on your handheld, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support/zire31.
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Synchronizing
• Synchronizing your handheld with Palm Desktop software or Microsoft
Outlook on your computer
• Choosing whether or not to synchronize information for a specific
application
• Synchronizing using the IR port on your handheld and your computer
• Transferring information to your handheld from an outside source, such
as a file containing your company’s phone list
Installing and
Removing
• Adding applications to your handheld
• Installing additional software from the CD
• Deleting applications from your handheld
• Viewing application information
Customizing
• Adjusting the screen display
• Reducing the Auto-off setting
• Keeping your handheld from turning on accidentally
Common
Questions
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Answers to frequently asked questions about setup
17
CHAPTER 2
Exploring Your Handheld
In this chapter
Locating the controls on
your handheld
What’s on the screen?
What software is on my
handheld?
What’s on the CD?
Related topics
Whether you’re at work, at home, or on
the go, you’ll quickly understand why
handhelds are also called personal
digital assistants (PDAs). Like a good
personal assistant, your handheld
helps you keep track of your schedule,
your business and personal contacts,
your to-do list, your memos, even your
money.
Handhelds are for fun, too. You can
create digital photo albums, play
games, and read eBooks. Insert
expansion cards (sold separately) to
listen to music, or to enjoy useful
reference software and more.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Benefits of your
Zire™ 31 handheld
•
•
•
•
Save time and stay organized
Travel light
Protect your information
Have fun: view photos, play music,
and more
18
CHAPTER 2
Exploring Your Handheld
Locating the controls on your handheld
Front panel controls
Screen
5-way navigator
Input area
Application buttons
Power button
Contacts
Calendar
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Screen
Displays the applications and information on your handheld. The
screen is touch-sensitive.
Input area
Lets you enter info with Graffiti® 2 writing or open the onscreen
keyboard.
Power button
Turns your handheld on or off and lets you turn Keylock on (if active).
5-way navigator
Helps you move around and select info to display on the screen.
Application
buttons
Open the Calendar and Contacts applications.
19
CHAPTER 2
Exploring Your Handheld
Top panel controls
»
Key Term
IR Short for infrared.
Beaming uses infrared
technology to send
information between two
IR ports that are within a
few feet of each other.
Expansion card slot
IR port
Headphone jack
Did You Know?
Beaming lets you quickly
share appointments,
addresses, phone
numbers, and more.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
IR port
Beams information between handhelds and other devices that have an
IR port.
Expansion card
slot
Lets you insert expansion cards (sold separately) to play music, back
up info, and add memory, applications, and accessories to your
handheld.
Headphone jack
Lets you connect a standard 3.5 mm stereo headset (sold separately) to
your handheld so you can listen to music and other audio applications.
20
CHAPTER 2
Exploring Your Handheld
Side and back panel controls
»
Key Term
USB The type of
connector or cable that’s
commonly used to
connect accessories to a
computer.
Stylus
Power connector
Reset button
Mini-USB
connector
Speaker
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Stylus
Lets you enter information on your handheld. To use the stylus, slide
it out of the slot and hold it as you would a pen or pencil. Using your
fingertip instead of the stylus is OK, but don’t use your fingernail, a
real pen, or other sharp object to touch the screen.
Reset button
Resets your handheld if it freezes (stops responding).
Power connector
Lets you connect the power adapter to your handheld so you can
charge it.
Mini-USB connector
Lets you connect your handheld to your computer, using the
HotSync® cable, so you can synchronize.
Speaker
Lets you listen to alarms, game and system sounds, and music.
21
CHAPTER 2
Exploring Your Handheld
What’s on the screen?
Your handheld includes many features that make it easy to use. Among them are the input area
and the common elements that appear on the screen in each of the applications. Once you learn
how to use them in one application you can easily use them in all the others.
Input area
Tapping the icons in the input area does the following:
Clock icon
Home icon
HotSync icon
Menu icon
Find icon
Letter keyboard
Icon
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Display icon
Number keyboard
Icon
Clock icon
Displays the current time and date. The display closes automatically after
two seconds. See Setting the date and time and Managing Clock
Settings for more information.
Display icon
Opens the Adjust Display dialog box where you can set the brightness
and contrast of your handheld’s display. See Adjusting the brightness
and contrast for instructions.
Home icon
Displays the Home screen where you can open applications. See
Opening applications for more information.
Menu icon
Opens the menus, where you can select items that provide access to
other features. See Using menus for more information.
22
CHAPTER 2
Exploring Your Handheld
HotSync icon
Synchronizes your handheld with your computer. See Synchronizing
Your Handheld with Your Computer for more information.
Find icon
Opens the Find dialog box where you can search for information. See
Finding information for more details.
Letter keyboard
icon
Opens the alphabetic keyboard. See Entering information with the
onscreen keyboard for details.
Number
keyboard icon
Opens the numeric keyboard. See Entering information with the
onscreen keyboard for details.
Application controls
»
Key Term
Slider The solid area on
the scroll bar. The slider
moves to indicate the
relative position within
the entry or list.
Tip
You can also use the
navigator to select an
item from a pick list and
to select some command
buttons.
Previous/next arrows
Entry box
Pick list
Scroll bar
Check box
Command button
Previous/next
arrows
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Tips icon
Tap the left and right arrows to view the previous and next entry;
where up and down arrows appear, tap them to view the previous
and next screens of information.
23
CHAPTER 2
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Exploring Your Handheld
Scroll bar
Drag the slider, or tap the top or bottom arrow, to scroll the display
one line at a time. To scroll to the previous screen, tap the scroll bar
just above the slider. To scroll to the next screen, tap the scroll bar
just below the slider.
Command button
Tap a button, such as OK, Cancel, or Details to perform a command or
to open a dialog box. Command buttons appear at the bottom of
dialog boxes and application screens.
Tips icon
Tap the Tips icon to view shortcuts and other useful information for
the screen where the icon is located. When you’re finished viewing
the tip, tap Done.
Entry box
Tap an entry box to open a dialog box where you can enter info for
that field.
Pick list
Tap the arrow to display a list of choices, and then tap an item in the
list to select it.
Check box
Tap a check box to select or deselect it. When a check box contains a
checkmark, the corresponding option is selected and on. When a
check box is empty, the corresponding option is deselected and off.
24
CHAPTER 2
Exploring Your Handheld
What software is on my handheld?
Tip
Can’t find some of these
applications? Tap the
category list in the upperright corner of the Home
screen and select All.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Your handheld comes with many applications preinstalled and ready to use. Open these
applications by pressing the application buttons on the front panel or by selecting the icons on the
Home screen.
Quick Tour
Learn about your handheld and how to enter info.
Calculator
Do basic math calculations such as splitting restaurant bills and figuring tips.
Calendar
Manage your schedule, from lunch with a friend, to weekly meetings, to annual
events like holidays, to extended events like conferences and vacations. Even
color-code your schedule by category.
Card Info
View information about an expansion card seated in the expansion card slot.
Contacts
Store names and addresses, phone numbers, e-mail and web site addresses—
even photos and birthdays. Organize your contacts into categories.
Expense
Track business or travel expenses and print expense reports after you
synchronize with your computer.
HotSync
Synchronize the info on your handheld with the info on your computer.
Memos
Capture information such as meeting notes, lists of books to read, movies to see,
recipes, and anything else you need to write down.
Note Pad
Write on the screen in your own handwriting or draw a quick sketch.
Prefs
Customize your handheld’s sound levels, colors, security, and more.
Tasks
Stay on top of your to-do list. Enter things you need to do, prioritize them, set
alarms, and then monitor your deadlines.
World Clock
Set the time in your home city and two other locations, and set an alarm to wake
you up.
25
CHAPTER 2
Exploring Your Handheld
What’s on the CD?
Tip
To learn how to install the
desktop software from
the CD, see Step 3:
Installing your software.
Tip
To learn how to install
extra handheld software
from the CD, see
Installing the additional
software from the CD.
The CD includes desktop software for your computer and additional software for your handheld.
The desktop software lets you use your computer to view, enter, and manage info for many of the
applications on your handheld. Make sure you install the desktop software so that you can back up
the info on your handheld onto your computer.
The additional handheld software lets you do more things with your handheld. When you set up
your handheld you may have already installed some (or all) these applications. You can install any
remaining applications at any time.
Your CD includes titles such as the following:
Palm® Desktop software
View, enter, manage, and back up info for Calendar, Contacts, Tasks,
Memos, and Expense on your computer. You can also view, manage,
and back up info for Note Pad and palmOne™ Photos (Photos is
Windows only). When you synchronize your handheld with your
computer, the info is updated in both places. This application installs
automatically during the initial CD installation process.
palmOne™ Quick Install
Transfer applications and other files from your computer to your
handheld or to an expansion card that is seated in the expansion slot
(Windows only). This application installs automatically during the
initial CD installation process.
Send To Handheld droplet Transfer applications and other files from your computer to your
handheld or to an expansion card that is seated in the expansion slot
(Mac only). This application installs automatically during the initial CD
installation process.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Getting Started Guide
Keep the Getting Started Guide with you and view it on your handheld.
palmOne Photos
View photos on your handheld and create portable photo albums.
26
CHAPTER 2
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Exploring Your Handheld
RealOne Player
Listen to music on your handheld with an expansion card (sold
separately). Create playlists and organize your MP3 files. A desktop
application (Windows only) lets you create MP3 files from your music
CDs. Both Mac and Windows users can transfer MP3 files to an
expansion card for use on the handheld.
AudiblePlayer
Listen to newspapers, books, public radio, language instruction, and
more (additional fees may apply). Windows only.
Palm Reader®
Purchase and download eBooks from the web so that you can read
them when you want, where you want.
powerOne Calculator
Calculate math and business solutions with this enhanced calculator.
Handmark Solitaire
Enjoy hours of entertainment with this solitaire game.
Handmark
MobileDB
Use the included databases to track useful info such as car
maintenance, passwords, and more. You can also download and install
over a thousand ready-to-use databases (additional fees may apply).
Handmark
PDA Money
Manage your finances on the go. Use this application by itself, or buy
the optional conduit and transfer info to Quicken, Microsoft Money,
and more. On your handheld, this application appears as Splash
Money.
Addit
Preview, try, and buy software for your handheld (Windows only and
web access required).
27
CHAPTER 2
Exploring Your Handheld
Related topics
My Handheld
Make your handheld
uniquely yours. For great
tips, software, accessories,
and more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
myzire31.
Support
If you’re having problems
with your handheld, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support/zire31.
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Setup
Installing the desktop software from the CD
Entering
Information
• Entering information with Graffiti 2 characters and shortcuts
• Entering information with the onscreen letter and number keyboards
Moving
Around
• Opening applications and using menus
• Finding information
Synchronizing
Synchronizing your handheld with your computer
Sharing
Beaming applications and info to other Palm OS® handheld users
Installing and
Removing
Installing additional software from the CD
World Clock
Viewing the current date and time
Customizing
• Setting the current date and time
• Adjusting the brightness and contrast of the display
• Preventing your handheld from turning on by accident
Maintaining
• Caring for your handheld
• Resetting your handheld
Common
Questions
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Answers to frequently asked questions about your handheld
28
CHAPTER 3
Moving Around in Applications
In this chapter
Opening applications
Using menus
Using the 5-way navigator
Finding information
Related topics
Have you ever been to a new city and
felt a bit lost until you figured out that
the numbered streets run North/South
and the avenues run East/West?
Learning to move around your
handheld is similar. Most Palm OS®
applications use the same set of
application controls. So once you learn
how to use these standard controls,
you’ll be driving all over town and you
won’t even need a map.
Benefits of your
Zire™ 31 handheld
• Find and open applications quickly
• Access extra features with menus
• Move around applications with one
hand using the 5-way navigator
• Locate information in any application
with the Find feature
Zire™ 31 Handheld
29
CHAPTER 3
Moving Around in Applications
Opening applications
Did You Know?
You can reassign the
application buttons to
open whichever
applications you choose.
You can open applications with the application buttons on the front of your handheld or with the
application icons on the Home screen.
Using the application buttons
Press an application button to turn on your handheld and to open the application for that button.
Tip
Handheld on already?
Tap the Home icon to go
to the Home screen.
Did You Know?
You can use a favorite
photo as the background
for your Home screen.
Calendar
Tip
Don’t want to scroll
through icons on the
Home screen? Write the
first letter of the
application name in the
input area to jump to the
first application that
begins with that letter.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Contacts
Using the Home screen
Turn on your handheld, tap Home
, and tap an application icon, such as Note Pad.
Home
icon
30
CHAPTER 3
Moving Around in Applications
Switching between applications
You can switch between applications at any time. Just tap Home
and select an icon on the
Home screen or press an application button. Your handheld automatically saves your work in the
current application and switches to the other application.
Using menus
Tip
You can also open the
handheld menus by
tapping the application
title in the upper-left
corner of the screen.
When the menus are
open, you can use the
navigator to select menus
and menu items.
Menus let you access additional features and settings. They are easy to use, and once you master
them in one application, you know how to use them in all your applications.
0
1
Open an application.
2
Tap Menu
.
Application
title
to open the menus.
Menu
Menu
item
Menu icon
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
31
CHAPTER 3
Moving Around in Applications
3
Tap a menu title, and then tap a menu item.
Done
Using the Command stroke
Tip
Command mode is active
for just a few seconds, so
write the command letter
or tap an icon on the
Command toolbar
quickly.
Most menu items also have a Graffiti® 2 command letter, which is similar to the keyboard
shortcuts used on computers. The command letter appears to the right of the menu item.
To use a command letter, first write the Graffiti 2 Command stroke on the left side of the input
area, and then write the command letter. For example, to select Paste from the Edit menu, write
the Command stroke, followed by the letter p.
Command
stroke
Menu items
Command letters
NOTE When you write the Command stroke the Command toolbar appears. See the next
section for info on using the Command toolbar.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
32
CHAPTER 3
Moving Around in Applications
Using the Command toolbar
The Command toolbar displays different icons based on the active screen. For example, if you
have text selected, the icons might be Cut, Copy, and Paste. If no text is selected, the icons might
be Beam, Undo, and Delete.
To use the Command toolbar, write the Command stroke to display the Command toolbar, and
then tap an icon to select its command.
Command
stroke
Cut
Copy
Paste
Beam
Undo
Delete
Using the 5-way navigator
The 5-way navigator, located at the bottom of the front panel, lets you access information quickly
with one hand and without the stylus.To use the navigator, press Up, Down, Right, or Left; or press
Select in the center.
Up
Select
Left
Right
Down
The navigator does various things based on which type of screen you’re on.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
33
CHAPTER 3
Moving Around in Applications
Moving around the Home screen
Tip
To remove the selection
highlight without making
a selection, scroll to the
first icon (in the upper-left
corner), and then press
Left on the navigator.
Tip
From most applications
you can return to the
Home screen by holding
down Select on the
navigator.
In the Home screen, use the navigator to select and open an application.
Right or Left Scrolls to the next or previous application category.
Select
Category
• Inserts the selection highlight with a single press.
When the selection highlight is present:
Up, Down, Right, or Left Scrolls to the next icon
in the corresponding direction.
Select
Opens the selected application.
• Holding down Select opens the category list.
When the category list is open:
Up or Down Scrolls to the next or previous
category in the list.
Select
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Displays the selected category.
34
CHAPTER 3
Moving Around in Applications
Moving around list screens
In list screens, use the navigator to select and move between entries such as a note, memo,
contact, or photo.
Up or Down
Scrolls an entire screen of entries, as long as
there’s nothing highlighted. Hold down to
accelerate the scrolling.
Select
Inserts the selection highlight. When the
selection highlight is present:
Up or Down
entry.
Select
Left
Scrolls to the previous or next
Displays the selected entry.
Removes the selection highlight.
Moving around record screens
In record screens, use the navigator to scroll within the current entry or between entries.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Up or Down
Scrolls within the current entry.
Right or Left
Scrolls to the previous or next entry
(not available in Contacts).
Select
Returns to the list screen.
35
CHAPTER 3
Moving Around in Applications
Moving around dialog boxes
Dialog boxes appear when you select a button or option that requires you to provide additional
information. In dialog boxes, use the navigator to select a button.
Select
Activates a button, and then closes the
dialog box. The number of buttons in the
dialog box determines which button Select
activates:
One button
Activates that button.
Two or more buttons Activates the action
button (versus Cancel) such as OK, Yes, or
Delete.
[ ! ] IMPORTANT Read dialog boxes carefully. Selecting a button such as OK or Yes may cancel an
action or delete information.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
36
CHAPTER 3
Moving Around in Applications
Moving around menus
After you open the menus you can use the navigator to move between and to select menu items:
Up or Down
Scrolls within the current menu list.
Right or Left
Scrolls to the next or previous menu on the
menu bar.
Select
Selects the highlighted menu item.
Moving around pick lists
Access pick lists by tapping the triangle next to an option on the screen. When the pick list is open,
use the navigator to scroll through the list and select an item.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Up or Down
Scrolls within the pick list.
Select
Selects the highlighted item.
37
CHAPTER 3
Moving Around in Applications
Finding information
Tip
If you select text in an
application before you
tap Find, the selected text
automatically appears in
the Find dialog box.
Did You Know?
In most applications you
can also use Phone
Lookup to enter a
contact’s info in another
application.
You can use Find to locate any word or phrase in any application on your handheld. Find locates
any words that begin with the text you enter and is not case sensitive. For example, searching for
“plane” finds “planet” but not “airplane.” Searching for “davidson” also finds “Davidson.”
NOTE Find does not search applications on expansion cards.
0
1
Tap Find
2
Enter the text that you want to find, and then select OK.
3
Tap the text that you want to review.
.
Tip
Want to stop searching?
Tap Stop at any time
during a search. To
continue the search, tap
Find More.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
The entry you tapped appears on the screen.
38
CHAPTER 3
Moving Around in Applications
Related topics
My Handheld
Make your handheld
uniquely yours. For great
tips, software, accessories,
and more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
myzire31.
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Exploring
• Locating the controls on your handheld
• Discovering the built-in software on your handheld and the additional
software on the CD
• Getting familiar with the input area and onscreen application controls
Support
If you’re having problems
with your handheld, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support/zire31.
Entering
Information
• Entering information with Graffiti 2 characters and shortcuts
• Entering contact information in other applications
Sharing
Beaming information and applications to other Palm OS® handheld users
Privacy
Keeping information private by turning on security options
Categories
Creating categories and organizing your applications and information
Installing and
Removing
• Adding and deleting applications on your handheld
• Viewing application information
Customizing
• Using a photo as the Home screen background
• Viewing the Home screen in list format
• Organizing your applications into categories
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Maintaining
Caring for your handheld
Common
Questions
Answers to frequently asked questions about using your handheld and its
applications
39
CHAPTER 4
Entering Information
In this chapter
How can I enter information?
Entering information with
Graffiti 2 writing
Entering information with
the onscreen keyboard
Entering information with
your computer
Importing information from
other applications
Restoring archived items on
your computer
Entering info from Contacts
into another application
Editing information
Whether you’re scheduling a meeting
with your daughter’s teacher or adding
a new restaurant to your Contacts list,
you need to get that information into
your handheld. There are several ways
to do this.
You may find that you prefer one
method if you’re entering a small
amount of information, while another
works best for large amounts. Choose
the one that’s right for any situation.
Benefits of entering information
• Enter information on your handheld
or at your desk
• Choose the method that works best
for your situation
Related topics
Zire™ 31 Handheld
40
CHAPTER 4
Entering Information
How can I enter information?
• Graffiti® 2 writing (see below)
• The onscreen keyboard
• Palm® Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook on your computer
• Import information from other applications
• Phone Lookup
• Note Pad
• Visit www.palmOne.com/myzire31 and click the Accessories link to get an accessory keyboard
(additional fees may apply)
• Receive information beamed from another Palm OS® handheld
The most popular methods are using Graffiti 2 writing, the onscreen keyboard, and Palm Desktop
software or Microsoft Outlook on your computer.
Entering information with Graffiti 2 writing
You can enter info directly on your handheld with Graffiti 2 writing. Graffiti 2 writing includes any
character you can type on a standard keyboard. Entering these characters on your handheld is
very similar to the way you naturally write letters, numbers, and symbols. But instead of using a
pen and paper, you use the stylus and the input area on your handheld. With only a few minutes of
practice, you can learn to use Graffiti 2 writing—and help is always only a tap away.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
41
CHAPTER 4
Entering Information
Writing Graffiti 2 characters
0
Did You Know?
You can set up your
handheld so you can
write on the entire screen
with Graffiti 2 writing.
Did You Know?
Graffiti 2 writing
automatically capitalizes
the first letter of a
sentence or a new entry.
1
Open an application you use to enter information, like Calendar.
2
Tap the screen where you want your character to appear.
3
Position the stylus in the correct
part of the input area.
[ ! ] IMPORTANT If you don’t
make Graffiti 2 strokes in the
input area, your handheld does
not recognize them as text
characters.
4
Write numbers here
Write capital letters across the middle
Write the characters exactly as shown in the tables that follow these steps. Be
sure to start each stroke at the heavy dot.
5
Lift the stylus at the end of the stroke.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Write letters here
When you lift the stylus from the screen, your handheld recognizes
the stroke immediately and prints the character at the insertion
point on the screen.
42
CHAPTER 4
Entering Information
Keys to success with Graffiti 2 writing
Keep these guidelines in mind when using Graffiti 2 writing:
Did You Know?
Graffiti 2 characters made
with 2 strokes are
recognized after the
second stroke.
Did You Know?
Write uppercase letters
the same way you write
lowercase ones. The only
difference is where you
write them.
Tip
Your handheld has tables
displaying all of the
Graffiti 2 characters, short
cuts, and commands.
Customize your handheld
so you can display these
characters by drawing a
line from the bottom of
the screen to the top.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
• Write the characters exactly as shown In the following tables. Don’t write the dot. It’s only there
to show you where to begin writing the character.
• The Graffiti 2 writing area has two sections. Write lowercase letters on the left, numbers on the
right, and capital letters across the middle.
• Write at a natural speed, and do not write on a slant.
• Press firmly.
• Write large characters.
If you’re already familiar with Graffiti writing from an older Palm OS handheld, Graffiti 2 writing
will be easy to master. Characters are entered in exactly the same way, except for i, t, k, and the
number 4. These letters are now made with two strokes, just the way you would write them if you
were using a pen and paper.
Also, you no longer have to use the punctuation shift stroke for common punctuation like periods,
commas, or @. Just write these characters on the correct side of the input area and your handheld
immediately recognizes them.
43
CHAPTER 4
Entering Information
Graffiti 2 alphabet
Tip
You can select alternate
ways to write some
Graffiti 2 characters.
Choose the method that’s
most natural for you.
Tip
Customize your handheld
so that you can use the
entire screen to enter
Graffiti 2 characters, not
just the input area.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
0
Write lowercase letters on LEFT side,
and capital letters across MIDDLE of input area
Letter
Stroke
Letter
Stroke
Letter
Stroke
Letter
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
Stroke
44
CHAPTER 4
Entering Information
Graffiti 2 numbers
0
Write numbers on RIGHT side of input area
Number
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Stroke
Number
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Stroke
45
CHAPTER 4
Entering Information
Graffiti 2 punctuation marks
0
Write these marks on LEFT side of input area
Mark
Stroke
Mark
Period
.
Ampersand
&
Comma
,
Carriage
return
Apostrophe
‘
At
@
Space
Quotation mark
“
Question mark
?
Tab
Stroke
Exclamation
point
!
0
Zire™ 31 Handheld
46
CHAPTER 4
Entering Information
0
Write these marks on RIGHT side of input area
Mark
Stroke
Mark
Period
.
Backslash
\
Comma
,
Slash
/
Tilde
ñ
Left
parenthesis
(
Dash
–
Right
parenthesis
)
Plus
+
Equal sign
=
Stroke
Asterisk
*
Zire™ 31 Handheld
47
CHAPTER 4
Entering Information
Graffiti 2 accented characters
For accented characters, write the letter on the left side of the input area, and then write the accent
on the right side of the input area.
Tip
Get help writing any of
the Graffiti 2 characters in
most applications. Open
the Edit menu and select
Graffiti 2 Help.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
0
Write these marks on RIGHT side of input area
Accent
Stroke
Accent
Acute
á
Dieresis
ä
Grave
à
Circumflex
â
Tilde
ã
Ring
å
Stroke
48
CHAPTER 4
Entering Information
Graffiti 2 gestures
0
Write gestures on LEFT side,
or across the middle of input area
Gesture
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Stroke
Gesture
Cut
Paste
Copy
Undo
Stroke
49
CHAPTER 4
Entering Information
Writing Graffiti 2 symbols and other special characters
Symbols and other special characters can be written on either side of the input area, using the
Punctuation Shift stroke:
0
0
Tip
If you accidentally enter
the Punctuation Shift
stroke, enter it again to
cancel it, or wait a
moment and it
automatically disappears.
Did You Know?
Writing two Punctuation
Shift strokes cancels the
automatic capitalization
of the first letter of a new
entry or sentence.
1
Enter the Punctuation Shift
stroke.
.
When Punctuation Shift is active,
an indicator appears in the lowerright corner of the screen.
Punctuation shift
indicator
2
Write the symbol or other special character shown in the following table.
You can write a symbol or special character anywhere in the input area.
3
Enter another Punctuation Shift stroke to finish the character and to make it
appear more quickly.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Once the Punctuation Shift indicator disappears, you see the
character.
50
CHAPTER 4
Entering Information
Graffiti 2 symbols and special characters
0
Write symbols on EITHER side of input area
Zire™ 31 Handheld
51
CHAPTER 4
Entering Information
Writing Graffiti 2 ShortCuts
Graffiti 2 contains several ShortCuts to make entering common information easier. For example,
when you write the ShortCut stroke followed by dts, you automatically enter the current date and
time. You can also create your own ShortCuts.
0
0
1
Write the ShortCut stroke
This stroke appears at the
insertion point.
2
.
Write the ShortCut character from the following table.
You can write ShortCuts on the left-hand side of the input area, or across the
middle.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
The ShortCut stroke is replaced by the text the character
represents.
52
CHAPTER 4
Entering Information
Graffiti 2 ShortCuts
0
Write ShortCuts on LEFT side, or across MIDDLE of input area
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Entry
ShortCut
Entry
ShortCut
Date stamp
ds
Time stamp
ts
Date/time stamp
dts
Meeting
me
Breakfast
br
Lunch
lu
Dinner
di
53
CHAPTER 4
Entering Information
Entering information with the onscreen keyboard
You can use the onscreen keyboard in any application where you need to enter text, numbers, or
symbols on your handheld.
»
Key Term
Entry An item in an
application such as a
contact in Contacts or an
appointment in Calendar.
Tip
You can enter text
whenever you see a
blinking cursor on the
screen.
0
1
Open an entry:
a. Open an application.
b. Select an entry or tap New.
2
Tap one of the following to open
an onscreen keyboard:
ABC
Opens the letter keyboard.
123 Opens the number
keyboard.
Letter keyboard
Number keyboard
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
54
CHAPTER 4
Tip
When a keyboard is open,
you can tap abc, 123, or
Int’l to open any of the
other keyboards.
Entering Information
3
Tap the characters to enter text, numbers, and symbols, and then select Done.
Tab
Backspace
Return
Caps lock
Caps shift
Letter keyboard
Number keyboard
International keyboard
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
55
CHAPTER 4
Entering Information
Entering information with your computer
Tip
The Palm Desktop online
Help has lots of info
about how to use
Palm Desktop software.
Open the Help menu and
select Palm Desktop Help.
Do you have a lot of information to enter on your handheld? Consider entering it in Palm Desktop
software or Microsoft Outlook on your computer. When you synchronize your handheld with your
computer, the information is updated in both places.
NOTE If you choose to synchronize with Microsoft Outlook (Windows only), info from
Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and Memos is synchronized with Outlook. Other info, such as photos
and notes, is synchronized with Palm Desktop software.
WINDOWS ONLY
0
1
Open an application in Palm Desktop software:
a. Double-click the Palm Desktop icon on your computer desktop.
b. Click the icon in the launch bar to open the application.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
56
CHAPTER 4
Entering Information
Cont’d.
Launch bar
New
Edit
2
Do one of the following:
• Click New in the lower-left corner of the screen to create a new entry.
• Click an existing entry, and then click Edit in the lower-left corner of the
screen.
3
Enter the information, and then click OK.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
57
CHAPTER 4
Entering Information
4
Synchronize your handheld with your computer.
Done
MAC ONLY
0
1
Open an application:
a. Double-click the Palm Desktop icon in the Palm folder on your computer.
b. Click the icon in the toolbar to open the application.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
58
CHAPTER 4
Entering Information
2
Do one of the following:
• Click New in the upper-left corner of the screen to create a new entry.
• Click an existing entry, and then click Edit in the upper-left corner of the
screen.
3
Enter the information, and then click OK.
4
Synchronize your handheld with your computer.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
59
CHAPTER 4
Entering Information
Importing information from other applications
Tip
Palm Desktop Help has
lots of information about
importing from other
applications, including
step-by-step instructions.
Open the Help menu in
Palm Desktop software
and select Palm Desktop
Help for more details.
Do you have information on your computer in spreadsheets or databases and want to transfer it to
your handheld? Don’t spend time retyping it. Instead, import the info into Palm Desktop software.
Palm Desktop software can import the following types of files:
Calendar vCal/iCal (VCS/ICS) and Calendar archive (DBA)
Contacts vCard (VCF), comma-delimited (CSV, TXT), tab-delimited (TAB, TSV, TXT), Contacts
archive (ABA)
Memos Comma-delimited (CSV, TXT), tab-delimited (TAB, TSV, TXT), Memos archive (MPA), Text
(TXT)
Tasks Tasks archive (TDA)
WINDOWS ONLY
0
1
Save the file on your computer in one of the accepted formats.
2
Import the file into Palm Desktop software:
a. Double-click the Palm Desktop icon on your computer desktop.
b. Click the icon in the launch bar for the application you want to import the
information into.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
60
CHAPTER 4
Entering Information
Cont’d.
c. Click File, and then click
Import.
d. Follow the onscreen
instructions to map the fields
in your file to the fields in
Palm Desktop software, and
import the file.
3
Imported
fields
Synchronize your handheld with your computer.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
61
CHAPTER 4
Entering Information
MAC ONLY
0
1
Save the file on your computer in one of the accepted formats.
2
Import the file into Palm Desktop software:
a. Double-click the Palm Desktop icon in the Palm folder on your computer.
b. Click the icon on the toolbar for the application into which you want to
import information.
c. Click File, and then click Import.
d. Follow the onscreen instructions to import the file.
3
Synchronize your handheld with your computer.
Done
Restoring archived items on your computer
In many applications, you can save a copy of an item that you deleted from your handheld or
desktop software to an archive folder on your computer. This frees up space on your handheld,
while ensuring the information is available if you need it in the future.
You can restore individual entries or an entire archive file to the related application in your desktop
software. The Palm Desktop online Help and the Microsoft Outlook online Help have lots of info
about how to restore archived files. Refer to these Help files for details.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
62
CHAPTER 4
Entering Information
Entering info from Contacts into another application
Having lunch with someone whose info you have in Contacts? Use Phone Lookup to quickly enter
their name and phone number into the appointment you create in Calendar. This feature is
available in Calendar, Memos, Tasks, and Expense.
0
1
Open an entry:
a. Open an application.
b. Select an entry or tap New.
In Expense only: Tap Details, and then tap Attendees.
2
Add the Contact from Phone Lookup:
a. Tap where you want to enter the Contact.
b. Open the menus
.
c. Select Options, and then select Phone Lookup.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
63
CHAPTER 4
Entering Information
Cont’d.
d. Select the contact, and then select Add.
3
[ & ] OPTIONAL To add another contact, repeat step 2.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
The name and phone number of the contact are automatically
entered.
64
CHAPTER 4
Entering Information
Editing information
Editing information on your handheld is similar to editing with word-processing applications on
your computer. Select the information, and then apply the correct command.
Selecting information
There are several ways to select information that you want to edit or delete.
Selecting text
Place the cursor before or after the text you want to select, and drag
the cursor over all the text you want to select.
Selecting a word
• Tap twice on a word to select it.
• Place the cursor before or after the word, and drag it over the word
to select it.
Selecting a line
• Tap three times anywhere in a line to select it.
• Place the cursor before or after the line, and drag it over the line to
select it
Zire™ 31 Handheld
65
CHAPTER 4
Entering Information
Copying and pasting information
Tip
There are even faster
ways to copy and paste
information:
Copying and pasting information on your handheld is similar to editing with word-processing
applications on your computer.
0
• Use Graffiti 2 gestures
1
Select the information you want to copy.
• Use the Graffiti 2
Command stroke and the
command letter for cut,
copy, or paste (/X, /C, /P)
2
Copy the information:
• Select the text, write the
command stroke, and
then tap the icon for cut
or copy. Move to the
place where you want to
place the info, write the
command stroke again,
and tap the icon for paste.
a. Open the menus
.
b. Select Edit, and then select Copy.
3
Tap where you want to paste the information.
4
Select Edit, and then select Paste.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
66
CHAPTER 4
Entering Information
Deleting information
Delete all or part of an entry with the Cut command.
Tip
Delete information with
Graffiti 2 writing. Select
the information, and then
draw a line from right to
left in the input area.
0
1
Select the information you want to delete.
2
Delete the information:
a. Open the menus
.
b. Select Edit, and then select Cut.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
67
CHAPTER 4
Entering Information
Related topics
Community
To explore the world of
your handheld, go to
www.palmOne.com/
myzire31.
Support
If you’re having problems
entering information or
with anything else on your
handheld, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support/zire31.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Moving around
• Opening applications
• Using menus
Sharing
Beaming information to another Palm OS handheld
Customizing
• Selecting alternate ways to write some Graffiti 2 characters
• Using the entire screen to write Graffiti 2 characters
• Creating your own Graffiti 2 ShortCuts
Common
Questions
Answers to frequently asked questions about entering information
68
CHAPTER 5
Synchronizing Your Handheld
with Your Computer
In this chapter
Why synchronize
information?
What information is
synchronized?
How do I synchronize?
Customizing your
synchronization settings
Synchronizing with an
external file
Have you ever had to meet friends at a
certain time, so everyone needed to
synchronize their watches?
Synchronizing simply means that
information that has been entered or
updated in one place is automatically
updated in the other. And just as your
watches can be synchronized, you can
synchronize information—such as
photos or contacts—on your handheld
with information on your computer.
Related topics
If you use your handheld only on its
own and never synchronize it with your
computer, then you aren't taking full
advantage of your handheld. You can
do much more with your handheld if
you synchronize it with your computer.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
TM
Benefits of synchronizing
• Quickly enter and update information
on your computer and your handheld
• Install applications and files
• Protect your information
69
CHAPTER 5
Synchronizing Your Handheld with Your Computer
Why synchronize information?
Quickly enter and update information on your computer and handheld. Synchronizing updates
information both on your handheld and in Palm® Desktop software on your computer. For
example, you can quickly enter a contact list on your computer and then send it to your handheld
instead of re-entering the information.
NOTE During CD installation, you can choose to synchronize your handheld with Microsoft
Outlook on your computer (Windows only). If you do, information from Contacts, Calendar, Tasks,
and Memos is synchronized with Outlook. Other information, such as photos and notes, is
synchronized with Palm Desktop software. You can insert the CD at any time to choose
synchronization with Outlook if you did not do so during the initial installation.
Install applications and files. You can use palmOne™ Quick Install to send files to certain
applications on your handheld or to install additional software when you synchronize.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
70
CHAPTER 5
Synchronizing Your Handheld with Your Computer
Protect your information. When you synchronize information, you create a backup copy. If
something happens to your handheld or your computer, the information is not lost; one tap
restores it in both places.
[ ! ] IMPORTANT Be sure to synchronize at least once a day so that you always have an up-to-date
backup copy of important information.
What information is synchronized?
[ ! ] Before You Begin
Complete the following:
If you use the default settings, information from all the following applications is transferred each
time you synchronize your handheld with your computer:
• Initial handheld setup
• Install Palm Desktop
software from the CD
If you’ve installed applications from the CD such as Photos, these applications may also be
included in the defaults for synchronization.
NOTE Information from Photos is synchronized in Palm Desktop software on Windows
computers only. When you synchronize on a Mac computer, your photos are stored in the
Home:Pictures:palmOne Photos:username folder. Information from Expense is synchronized on
Windows computers only.
In addition, the default settings back up system information from your handheld to your computer
and install add-on applications from your computer to your handheld.
If you install other applications and want those applications included in synchronization, you can
choose which applications to synchronize.
Everybody in your family can synchronize their handheld to the same copy of Palm Desktop
software. Just make sure that each handheld has its own username; Palm Desktop software reads
the username and recognizes the handheld during synchronization. Although several people can
share the same copy of Palm Desktop software, they should not share the same username.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
71
CHAPTER 5
Synchronizing Your Handheld with Your Computer
How do I synchronize?
»
»
Key Term
HotSync® Technology
that allows you to
synchronize the info on
your handheld with the
info on your computer.
You can synchronize your handheld with your computer in the following ways:
Key Term
HotSync
Manager Software you
use to choose
synchronization settings
and that must be active
when you synchronize.
[ ! ] IMPORTANT The first time you synchronize, you must use the HotSync cable or your
handheld’s IR port. If you followed the instructions to synchronize during initial setup, you’ve
already covered this requirement.
Tip
If the Select User dialog
box appears during
synchronization, select
the username whose
information you want to
synchronize, and click OK.
Or, create a new
username.
On a Windows computer, you know HotSync Manager is active when its icon
appears in the
lower-right corner of your screen. If the icon is not there, turn it on by clicking Start, and then
selecting Programs. Navigate to the Palm Desktop software program group, and select HotSync
Manager.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
• Using the HotSync® cable attached to your handheld and your computer
• Using your handheld’s infrared (IR) port
• Connecting to your company’s network, either wirelessly or using a cable (Windows only)
To synchronize, HotSync Manager must be active. HotSync Manager was installed when you
installed Palm® Desktop software; if you didn’t install Palm Desktop software, you don’t have
HotSync Manager on your computer.
72
CHAPTER 5
Synchronizing Your Handheld with Your Computer
Synchronizing with a cable
0
Tip
If you need help with
synchronizing, see I can’t
synchronize my handheld
with my computer.
Tip
View the HotSync log to
see what applications
were successfully
synchronized and
whether any problems
took place during
synchronization. Go to
the Home screen on your
handheld and select
HotSync, and then select
Log; or, click the HotSync
Manager icon on your
computer and then click
View Log. If any problems
occurred during
synchronization, a
message appears on your
computer screen asking if
you want to view the log.
1
Prepare your handheld:
a. Connect the HotSync cable to
the USB port on your
computer, and then insert the
other end into the mini-USB
connector on your handheld.
b. Make sure your handheld is
on.
2
Synchronize your handheld with
your computer:
a. Tap HotSync
.
b. When synchronization is
complete, a message appears
at the top of your handheld
screen, and you can
disconnect your handheld
from the cable. Be patient;
synchronization may take up
to a few minutes.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
73
CHAPTER 5
Synchronizing Your Handheld with Your Computer
Synchronizing using the IR port
When you synchronize using your handheld’s IR port, you don’t need your cable. This is especially
useful if you travel with an IR-enabled laptop.
WINDOWS ONLY
[ ! ] Before You Begin
Your computer must have
an enabled IR port and
driver or have an IR
device attached to it.
Check your computer's
documentation to see if it
supports IR
communication.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
0
1
Prepare your computer for IR synchronization:
a. Click the HotSync Manager icon
your screen.
in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of
b. Make sure that Infrared is selected.
Continued
74
CHAPTER 5
Tip
You can continue to use
the HotSync cable even if
your computer is set up
for IR synchronization. If
you disconnect the cable
after selecting Infrared on
a Windows computer, be
sure to click the HotSync
Manager icon and select
Local USB before
reconnecting the cable.
Synchronizing Your Handheld with Your Computer
2
Synchronize your handheld with
your computer:
a. Go to the Home
select HotSync
screen and
.
HotSync icon
b. Tap Local.
c. Tap the pick list below the
HotSync icon and select IR to
a PC/Handheld.
Tap pick list
d. Position the IR port of your
handheld within a few inches of the IR port of your computer.
e. Tap the HotSync icon
on your handheld.
f. When synchronization is complete, a message appears at the top of your
handheld screen. Be patient; synchronization may take up to a few minutes.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
75
CHAPTER 5
Synchronizing Your Handheld with Your Computer
MAC ONLY
0
1
Prepare your computer for IR synchronization:
a. Double-click the HotSync Manager icon
in the Palm folder.
b. In the HotSync Controls tab, select Enabled.
c. Click the Connection Settings tab.
d. Select the On check box next to IR port.
e. Close the HotSync Software Setup window.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
76
CHAPTER 5
Did You Know?
You can continue to use
the HotSync cable even if
your computer is set up
for IR synchronization.
Tip
Mac Turn off the IR port
when you’re not using it
to increase the speed of
cable synchronization.
Synchronizing Your Handheld with Your Computer
2
Synchronize your handheld with
your computer:
a. Go to the Home
select HotSync
screen and
.
HotSync icon
b. Select Local.
c. Tap the pick list below the
HotSync icon and select IR to
a PC/Handheld.
Tap pick list
d. Position the IR port of your
handheld within a few inches of the IR port of your computer.
e. Tap the HotSync icon
on your handheld.
f. When synchronization is complete, a message appears at the top of your
handheld screen. Be patient; synchronization may take up to a few minutes.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
77
CHAPTER 5
Synchronizing Your Handheld with Your Computer
Synchronizing over a network
WINDOWS ONLY
[ ! ] Before You Begin
The following setup must
be done before you can
synchronize over a
network:
• Your computer must
have TCP/IP installed.
• Your company’s
network system and its
remote access server
must support TCP/IP.
• You must have a
remote access account.
Check with your system
administrator for
assistance.
To synchronize by dialing
in to a network, you must
also have a mobile phone
(sold separately) that you
can use as a modem to
dial in to the network, or
an attachable modem
accessory (sold
separately).
Zire™ 31 Handheld
You can synchronize over your company’s network by dialing in to a network or by connecting to
any computer on the network using a cable or your handheld’s IR port. Use network
synchronization if you are not close enough to your computer to synchronize directly using a cable
or the IR port.
[ ! ] IMPORTANT The first time you synchronize, you must use the cable or infrared
communication. After that, you can synchronize over a network.
Synchronizing by dialing in to a network
0
1
Prepare your computer for network synchronization:
a. Click the HotSync Manager icon
your screen.
in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of
b. Select Network.
c. Click the HotSync Manager icon again, and then select Setup.
Continued
78
CHAPTER 5
Tip
Click TCP/IP Settings to
display the primary
settings for your
computer. Check that
these settings are correct
on your handheld by
selecting the HotSync
icon on the Home screen,
and then selecting
Primary PC Setup from
the Options menu. If the
settings do not match,
restart your computer
and synchronize using
the cable or IR port before
synchronizing by dialing
in to a network.
Synchronizing Your Handheld with Your Computer
Cont’d.
d. Click the Network tab and make sure your username has a checkmark next to
it. If the checkmark is not there, click the check box next to your username.
e. Click OK.
on your handheld to record your computer’s network
f. Tap HotSync
information on your handheld. You must use the cable or the IR port for this
synchronization.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
79
CHAPTER 5
Synchronizing Your Handheld with Your Computer
2
Prepare your handheld for
network synchronization:
a. Go to the Home
screen
and select HotSync
.
b. Open the menus
.
c. Select Options, and then
select Modem Sync Prefs.
d. Select Network, and then
select OK.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
80
CHAPTER 5
Tip
Use Network Preferences
to set up a service if you
have not done so already.
Check with your system
administrator to obtain
network service
information.
Synchronizing Your Handheld with Your Computer
3
Select a service:
a. Select Modem, and then tap Select Service.
b. Tap the Service pick list and select the service you use to connect to your
corporate network. Check with your system administrator if you do not know
which service to use.
c. Select Done.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
81
CHAPTER 5
Did You Know?
Only applications that
have a conduit are
included in
synchronization. Other
applications are not
included, even if they
appear on the Conduit
Setup screen with a
checkmark next to their
name.
Tip
You can deselect
applications, for example,
to include a smaller
number of applications
during synchronization
and thus make
synchronization go faster.
To synchronize the preset
applications described in
What information is
synchronized?, skip
step 4.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Synchronizing Your Handheld with Your Computer
4
[ & ] OPTIONAL Select which
applications to include during
synchronization:
a. Open the menus
.
b. Select Options, and then
select Conduit Setup.
c. Tap the check boxes to
deselect the files and
applications that you do not
want to synchronize during a
modem HotSync operation.
d. Select OK.
5
Tap the Modem HotSync icon
computer.
to synchronize your handheld with your
Done
82
CHAPTER 5
Synchronizing Your Handheld with Your Computer
Synchronizing by connecting to a computer on the network
[ ! ] Before You Begin
In addition to the general
requirements for network
synchronization, you
must meet the following
requirements in order to
synchronize by
connecting with a
computer on the network:
• To connect using your
handheld’s IR port, the
computer to which you
are connecting must be
IR-compatible.
0
1
Prepare the computers for network synchronization:
a. Click the HotSync Manager icon
the screen.
in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of
b. Select Network.
NOTE You must select Network on both the computer to which you are
connecting and the computer with which you want to synchronize.
Continued
• The computer to which
you are connecting must
have a version of
Palm Desktop software
that is compatible with
your handheld.
• The computer with
which you want to
synchronize (your own
computer) must be
turned on.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
83
CHAPTER 5
Tip
Click TCP/IP Settings to
display the primary
settings for your
computer. Check that
these settings are correct
on your handheld by
selecting the HotSync
icon on the Home screen,
and then selecting
Primary PC Setup from
the Options menu. If the
settings do not match,
restart your computer
and synchronize using
the cable or IR port before
synchronizing by
connecting to a computer
on the network.
Synchronizing Your Handheld with Your Computer
2
On the computer with which you want to synchronize (your own computer)
only, do the following:
a. Select Setup from the HotSync Manager menu.
b. Click the Network tab and make sure your username has a checkmark next to
it. If the checkmark is not there, click the check box next to your username.
c. Click OK.
on your handheld to record your computer’s network
d. Tap HotSync
information on your handheld. You must use the cable or the IR port for this
synchronization.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
84
CHAPTER 5
Synchronizing Your Handheld with Your Computer
3
Prepare your handheld for
network synchronization:
a. Go to the Home
screen
and select HotSync
.
b. Open the menus
.
c. Select Options, and then
select LANSync Prefs.
d. Select LANSync, and then
select OK.
4
Synchronize over the network:
On the HotSync screen, select Local.
Tap the HotSync icon
to synchronize your handheld with your computer.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
85
CHAPTER 5
Synchronizing Your Handheld with Your Computer
Customizing your synchronization settings
You can set the following options for synchronization:
• Choosing how your computer responds when you initiate synchronization on your handheld
(Windows only)
• Enabling or disabling synchronization on your computer, setting whether synchronization is
enabled automatically when you start your computer; and choosing how much information to
include in the synchronization troubleshooting log (Mac only)
• Choosing how application information is updated during synchronization
Choosing how your computer responds to synchronization requests
WINDOWS ONLY
In order for your computer to respond with you initiate synchronization on your handheld,
HotSync Manager must be running. You can choose whether HotSync manager always runs
automatically, or whether you must perform some action to start HotSync manager.
0
1
Open the synchronization options screen:
a. Click the HotSync Manager icon
your screen.
in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of
b. Select Setup.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
86
CHAPTER 5
Tip
Use the default setting
Always available if you’re
not sure which option you
want.
Tip
If you select Manual, you
must turn off HotSync
Manager, which is always
on by default. Click the
HotSync Manager icon in
the taskbar in the lowerright corner of your
screen, and then click
Exit. To start HotSync
Manager when you want
to synchronize, click Start,
and then select
Programs. Navigate to
the Palm Desktop
software program group,
and select HotSync
Manager.
Note that if you turn
HotSync Manager on, it
stays on until you turn off
your computer.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Synchronizing Your Handheld with Your Computer
2
Select how your computer responds when you initiate synchronization on your
handheld:
Always available HotSync Manager runs automatically every time you initiate
synchronization on your handheld.
Available only when the Palm Desktop software is running You must open
Palm Desktop software in order for HotSync Manager to run.
Manual You must manually turn HotSync Manager on each time you want
your computer to respond to a synchronization request.
3
Click OK.
Done
87
CHAPTER 5
Synchronizing Your Handheld with Your Computer
Setting synchronization options
MAC ONLY
0
1
Open the synchronization options screen:
a. Double-click the HotSync Manager icon
in the Palm folder.
b. Click the HotSync Controls tab.
2
Select the synchronization options you want:
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
88
CHAPTER 5
Synchronizing Your Handheld with Your Computer
Cont’d.
HotSync Enabled/Disabled Sets your computer to respond to synchronization
requests from your handheld.
Enable HotSync software at system startup Sets your computer to
automatically respond to synchronization requests each time you start your
computer. If this option is not selected, you must open HotSync Manager and
select the Enabled option before you can synchronize.
Show more detail in HotSync Log Includes more troubleshooting information
in the log that is generated when you synchronize.
3
Close the HotSync Software Setup window.
Done
»
Key Term
Conduit The
synchronization software
that transfers information
between an application
on your computer and the
same application on your
handheld.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Choosing whether application information is updated
By default, when information in each application is updated in one place (your handheld or your
computer), it is updated in the other. However, for an application included during synchronization,
you can choose whether information that has been updated in one place is updated in the other
during the next synchronization.
89
CHAPTER 5
Synchronizing Your Handheld with Your Computer
WINDOWS ONLY
Tip
Windows For
information on choosing
whether application
information is updated if
you are synchronizing
your handheld with
Outlook, see the online
Outlook synchronization
Help. Click the HotSync
Manager icon in the
taskbar in the lower-right
corner of your screen,
select Custom, and then
select one of the Outlook
applications from the list.
Select Change, and then
select one of the
applications from the list.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
0
1
Select the application you want to customize:
a. Click the HotSync Manager icon
your screen.
in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of
b. Select Custom.
c. Select the appropriate username from the drop-down list at the top of the
screen.
d. Select the application you want, and then click Change.
Continued
90
CHAPTER 5
Tip
You should generally
keep the default setting
(Synchronize the files) for
all applications. Choose
an overwrite option only
if you have a specific
reason for sending
updates only one way.
Choose Do Nothing if you
never use an application.
Synchronizing Your Handheld with Your Computer
2
Choose how information is updated during the next synchronization:
Synchronize the files Information that is changed in one place (your handheld
or computer) is updated in the other during synchronization.
Desktop overwrites handheld Information that has been changed on your
computer is updated on your handheld during synchronization. If information
has been changed on your handheld, it will be replaced by the information from
your computer, and you will lose the changes you made on your handheld.
Handheld overwrites Desktop Information that has been changed on your
handheld is updated on your computer during synchronization. If information
has been changed on your computer, it will be replaced by the information from
your handheld, and you will lose the changes you made on your computer.
Do Nothing No synchronization occurs, so any changes made on either your
handheld or your computer are not updated in the other location.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
91
CHAPTER 5
Synchronizing Your Handheld with Your Computer
3
4
To use the option you select on an ongoing basis, select the Set as default check
box. If you do not select this box, the option you select applies only the next
time you synchronize. Thereafter, information is updated according to the
default setting (Synchronize the files).
Click OK, and then click Done.
Done
MAC ONLY
0
1
Select the application you want to customize:
a. Double-click the Palm Desktop icon
in the Palm folder.
b. From the HotSync menu, select Conduit Settings.
c. From the User pop-up menu, select the appropriate username.
d. Select an application.
e. Click Conduit Settings.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
92
CHAPTER 5
Tip
You should generally
keep the default setting
(Synchronize the files) for
all applications. Choose
an overwrite option only
if you have a specific
reason for sending
updates only one way.
Choose Do Nothing if you
never use an application.
Synchronizing Your Handheld with Your Computer
2
Choose how information is updated during the next synchronization:
Synchronize the files Information that is changed in one place (your handheld
or computer) is updated in the other during synchronization.
Desktop overwrites handheld Information that has been changed on your
computer is updated on your handheld during synchronization. If information
has been changed on your handheld, it will be replaced by the information from
your computer, and you will lose the changes you made on your handheld.
Handheld overwrites Desktop Information that has been changed on your
handheld is updated on your computer during synchronization. If information
has been changed on your computer, it will be replaced by the information from
your handheld, and you will lose the changes you made on your computer.
Do Nothing No synchronization occurs, so any changes made on either your
handheld or your computer are not updated in the other location.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
93
CHAPTER 5
Synchronizing Your Handheld with Your Computer
3
4
To use the option you select on an ongoing basis, click Make Default. If you do
not select this box, the option you select applies only the next time you
synchronize. Thereafter, information is updated according to the default setting
(Synchronize the files).
Click OK, and then close the Conduit Settings window.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
94
CHAPTER 5
Synchronizing Your Handheld with Your Computer
Synchronizing with an external file
WINDOWS ONLY
The File Link feature enables you to import Contacts and Memos information to your handheld
from a separate external file such as a company phone list. You can set up File Link to check for
changes to the external file, and then import those changes to your handheld during
synchronization.
With File Link you can import information stored in any of the following formats:
• Comma-separated (*.csv)
• Memos archive (*.mpa)
• Contacts archive (*.aba)
• Text (*.txt)
For information on how to set up a file link, see the Palm Desktop online Help.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
95
CHAPTER 5
Synchronizing Your Handheld with Your Computer
Related topics
My Handheld
Make your handheld
uniquely yours. For great
tips, software, accessories,
and more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
myzire31.
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Installing and
Removing
Using palmOne Quick Install or Send to Handheld droplet to add
applications to your handheld
Common
Questions
Answers to frequently asked questions about synchronization
Support
If you’re having problems
with synchronization or with
anything else on your
handheld, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support/zire31.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
96
CHAPTER 6
Expanding Your Handheld
In this chapter
What type of expansion
cards can I use?
How can expansion cards
help me?
A Chinese proverb says, “Life just
gives you time and space; it's up to
you to fill it.” But doesn’t it always
seem that no matter how much space
you have, you still need more?
Inserting an expansion card
Removing an expansion card
Opening an application on
an expansion card
Opening files on an
expansion card
Viewing card information
Renaming a card
Copying applications to an
expansion card
Removing all information
from a card
Expansion cards (sold separately)
provide a compact and limitless
answer to the storage dilemma. When
one card becomes full, simply use
another card. To enjoy some aspects of
your handheld, such as listening to
music, you need to use expansion
cards.
Benefits of expansion cards
•
•
•
•
•
•
Listen to music
View and store more photos
Back up info
Add more games and other software
Add accessories
Store all your info
Related topics
Zire™ 31 Handheld
97
CHAPTER 6
Expanding Your Handheld
What type of expansion cards can I use?
»
Key Term
SDIO An acronym for
Secure Digital input/
output.
Tip
Looking for a handy way
to carry your expansion
cards? You can purchase
a variety of carrying
cases. Visit
www.palmOne.com/
myzire31 and click the
Accessories link.
Your handheld is compatible with SDIO, SD, and MultiMediaCard expansion cards. SDIO
expansion cards let you add accessories to your handheld. SD and MultiMediaCard expansion
cards let you store information and applications.
How can expansion cards help me?
Listen to music. Store songs on expansion cards and use the included RealOne software to
listen to music on your handheld.
View and store more photos. If your digital camera (sold separately) uses compatible expansion
cards, you can quickly view your photos by simply inserting the card into the expansion slot on
your handheld. And if your camera doesn’t use compatible expansion cards, don’t worry, you can
still view your photos. See Copying photos to your handheld for details.
Back up info. Make a copy of your important information for safe-keeping in case your handheld
becomes damaged or is stolen. (Backup card required, sold separately.)
Add games and other software. Purchase popular games, dictionaries, travel guides, and more.
To check out the variety of expansion cards available for your handheld, visit www.palmOne.com/
myzire31 and click the Accessories link.
Add accessories. Attach SDIO accessories, such as a presentation module, to your handheld.
Store all your info. Never worry about running out of space on your handheld. Purchase as many
expansion cards as you need to store your music, photos, and other information. Expansion cards
come in a variety of capacities, and they’re very small, easy to store, and affordably priced.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
98
CHAPTER 6
Expanding Your Handheld
Inserting an expansion card
0
1
Insert the card into the expansion
slot with the label side facing the
front of the handheld.
Push
Label side
2
Push the card in with your thumb
until you hear the confirmation
tone.
NOTE No confirmation tone?
Check the Sounds & Alerts
Preferences to make sure the
System Sound setting is turned
on.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
99
CHAPTER 6
Expanding Your Handheld
Removing an expansion card
0
Tip
To prevent damaging the
card and the info on it,
always wait for your
handheld to finish writing
to the expansion card
before you remove the
card from the slot.
1
Push lightly against the card with
your thumb until you hear the
confirmation tone.
Push
2
Slide the card out of the
expansion slot.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
100
CHAPTER 6
Expanding Your Handheld
Opening an application on an expansion card
Did You Know?
You can install
applications and other
files to an expansion card
during synchronization.
Tip
When the highlight on the
Home screen is not
active, you can hold
down Select on the to
open the category pick
list.
When you insert an expansion card into the expansion slot, your handheld adds the expansion
card to the category list in the upper-right corner of the screen. You can easily switch between
applications installed on your handheld and on the expansion card.
NOTE Some applications may not run correctly when you install them on an expansion card.
Try installing these applications on your handheld instead. If you still have problems, contact the
developer.
0
1
Go to the Home
2
Insert the expansion card.
3
Select an application icon to open that application.
screen.
Tip
Expansion card already in
the expansion slot?
Select the category pick
list and select the card
name to view the
applications on the card.
Category
pick list
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
101
CHAPTER 6
Expanding Your Handheld
Opening files on an expansion card
Some applications, such as RealOne Player, require you to store your files on an expansion card
instead of on your handheld. In other applications, such as palmOne™ Photos, storing files on
expansion cards is optional. You can open files on an expansion card when you insert the card into
the expansion slot.
0
1
Open the application associated with the files you want to open.
2
Insert the expansion card.
3
Select the entry you want to view.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
102
CHAPTER 6
Expanding Your Handheld
Viewing card information
Tip
Reading and writing info
on an expansion card
uses more battery power
than doing the same task
on your handheld. If you
have enough space on
your handheld, consider
copying the info to your
handheld.
It’s easy to forget which files you put on a particular expansion card. Use the Card Info application
to view the card name and type, available storage space, and a summary of its contents.
Go to the Home
screen and select Card Info
.
Card name
Space available
Summary of contents
Tip
If your handheld’s battery
is very low, access to the
expansion card may be
disabled. If this occurs,
recharge your handheld
as soon as possible.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
103
CHAPTER 6
Expanding Your Handheld
Renaming a card
The expansion card name appears in the category pick list and in other lists that let you choose
where to store your info. When you buy a new card, give it a name that helps you remember
what’s on the card. You can rename the card later if you decide to store different info on the card.
0
1
2
Go to the Home
screen and select Card Info
.
Open the Rename Card dialog
box:
a. Open the menus
.
b. Select Rename Card on the
Card menu.
3
Enter the new name for the card, and then select Rename.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
104
CHAPTER 6
Expanding Your Handheld
Copying applications to an expansion card
Tip
If you use a card reader to
view your card on a
computer, the file names
may differ from the
names you see on the
Home screen.
0
1
Insert the expansion card, and then go to the Home
2
Open the Copy dialog box:
c. Open the menus
Did You Know?
Some applications, such
as Photos, let you copy or
move info between your
handheld and an
expansion card. See the
information on each
application for details.
screen.
.
d. Select Copy on the App menu.
3
Select the application to copy:
NOTE A lock appears next to applications that are copy-protected. You
cannot copy or beam these applications.
a. Tap the Copy From pick list and select Handheld.
b. Tap the application you want to copy.
c. Tap Copy.
d. Select Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
105
CHAPTER 6
Expanding Your Handheld
Removing all information from a card
Formatting a card removes all of its info and prepares it to accept new applications and files.
[ ! ] IMPORTANT We do not recommend formatting backup cards. Formatting removes the
backup application and turns the card into a blank memory card.
0
1
Insert an expansion card.
2
Go to the Home
3
Format the card:
a. Open the menus
screen and select Card Info
.
.
b. Select Format Card on the
Card menu.
c. When asked if you want to
format the card, select OK.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
106
CHAPTER 6
Expanding Your Handheld
Related topics
My Handheld
Make your handheld
uniquely yours. For great
tips, software, accessories,
and more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
myzire31.
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Sharing
Exchanging applications and information with other Palm OS® handheld
users by exchanging cards or beaming items between handhelds
Installing and
Removing
Adding applications from your computer to an expansion card, and
installing other files such as photos or music
Support
If you’re having problems
with expansion cards or with
anything else on your
handheld, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support/zire31.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
107
CHAPTER 7
Managing Your Contacts
In this chapter
Adding a contact
Copying contact information
into multiple contacts
Locating a contact on your
list
Customizing the Contacts
list
Working with Contacts on
your computer
Related topics
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Say good-bye to a paper address book
that you need to update manually
every time someone moves, changes
their e-mail address, or gets a new
work extension. With Contacts, not
only is it easy to enter information such
as names, addresses, and phone
numbers, but it is just as quick to view,
update, and organize contact
information.
You can back up contact information to
your computer and easily share info
with other handhelds. You can even
add photos of your loved ones directly
to their contact information screen.
Benefits of Contacts
• Carry all your business and personal
contact information in your hand
• Keep track of who is who
• Keep in touch
108
CHAPTER 7
Managing Your Contacts
Adding a contact
[ ! ] Before You Begin
If you want to add photos
to your contacts, install
palmOne™ Photos from
the installation CD onto
your handheld.
Windows Insert the CD
and follow the onscreen
instructions to install
extra software.
0
1
Press the Contacts
2
Add your contact information:
application button.
a. Select New.
Mac Insert the CD and
double-click the Essential
Software folder icon.
Did You Know?
If the first character you
enter in the Last Name or
Company field is an
asterisk (*) or another
symbol, that record
always appears at the top
of the Contacts list. That’s
useful for an entry like “If
Found Call [your phone
number].”
Zire™ 31 Handheld
b. Tap each field where you want to enter information, and enter it. Tap the
scroll arrows to view more fields.
Continued
109
CHAPTER 7
Tip
To learn how to transfer
photos to your handheld,
see palmOne™ Photos.
Managing Your Contacts
Cont’d.
The following fields contain features to help you enter information quickly:
All fields except numeric and e-mail fields
capitalized.
Tip
If multiple contacts share
information, such as a
company name and
address, you can enter
the first contact, and then
copy the information into
other contacts.
The first letter is automatically
Title, Company, City, and State As you enter letters, a match appears if you
have one on your Contacts list. For example, if you enter S, Sacramento might
appear, and if you then enter a and n, San Francisco might replace Sacramento.
When the word you want appears, tap the next field.
Address You can enter up to three addresses, each containing five fields: Addr,
City, State, Zip Code, and Country. You can designate an address as work (W),
home (H), or other (O). By default, the first address is designated as work.
3
[ & ] OPTIONAL
Add a photo:
a. Tap the Picture box.
Tap here
b. Select the photo you want.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
110
CHAPTER 7
Tip
If you want a reminder
about a birthday, select
the Reminder check box,
enter the number of days
before the birthday that
you want to see the
reminder, and then select
OK.
Did You Know?
Birthdays you enter in
Contacts appear as
untimed events in
Calendar. If you update
the birthday in Contacts,
it automatically updates
in Calendar as well.
Managing Your Contacts
4
[ & ] OPTIONAL
birthday:
a. Tap the Birthday box.
b. Use the left and right arrows
to move to and select the birth
year. Hold down either arrow
to scroll quickly through the
years.
c. Select the month and date.
5
After you finish entering all the information you want, select Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Add a
That’s it. Your handheld automatically saves the contact. Make
sure you have a current backup. Synchronize often.
111
CHAPTER 7
Tip
Additional fields appear
in a contact only if you
enter info into them. If
you leave a field blank, it
does not appear the next
time you open the
Contact Edit screen. Also,
additional fields apply
only to the current
contact; you can
duplicate contact
information if you need to
apply the same fields to
multiple contacts.
Did You Know?
Each field type can be
displayed a certain
number of times, up to a
preset maximum. Once
you reach this maximum,
the field type no longer
appears on the pop-up
list. For example, you can
display up to seven
Phone/Email fields.
Tip
Tap the Note icon next to
the plus button to add a
note to the contact.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Managing Your Contacts
Entering additional contact information
The Contact Edit screen displays certain fields by default. You can customize the Contact Edit
screen to display additional fields.
0
1
Press the Contacts
2
Display additional contact fields:
application button.
a. Select the contact you want, and then select Edit.
b. Tap the plus button on the lower-right corner of the Contact Edit screen.
Tap here
Note icon
c. Select the field you want displayed from the list. The field appears in a preset
location on the Contact Edit screen.
Done
112
CHAPTER 7
Managing Your Contacts
Selecting contact field types
You can select the types of phone numbers (work, home, mobile, pager, and so on), as well as
specify the instant messenger (IM) account, that you associate with a contact.
Tip
Any changes you make to
field types apply only to
the current contact. You
can duplicate contact
information if you need to
apply the same contact
fields to multiple
contacts.
Did You Know?
The e-mail address field
type is located on the
same pick list as the
phone number fields. IM
field types are located on
a separate pick list.
0
1
Press the Contacts
2
Customize the contact field type:
application button.
a. Select the contact you want, and then select Edit.
b. Tap the pick list next to the field you want to change and select the new field
type you want. Available fields include phone number, e-mail address, and
instant messenger (IM) fields.
NOTE You must set up an instant messenger account with a service
provider to use instant messaging on your handheld.
Tap triangle
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
113
CHAPTER 7
Managing Your Contacts
Defining custom fields
You can define the custom fields that appear at the end of the Contact Edit screen to display any
additional contact information you want, such as spouse’s or children’s names, favorite color, or
any other information.
0
1
Press the Contacts
2
Define the custom fields:
application button.
a. Select the contact you want,
and then select Edit.
b. Open the menus
.
c. Select Options, and then
select Rename Custom Fields.
d. Enter names for up to nine
custom fields, and then tap
OK.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
114
CHAPTER 7
Managing Your Contacts
Selecting a contact as your business card
You can create a contact with your own information and select it as your business card by opening
the Record Menu and selecting Business Card. You can then beam your business card to other
handhelds. To beam your business card quickly, hold down the Contacts application button for
approximately two seconds.
0
1
Press the Contacts
2
Create a business card:
application button.
a. Select the contact you want, or create a new contact with your own contact
information.
b. Open the menus
.
c. Select Business Card on the Record menu.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
115
CHAPTER 7
Managing Your Contacts
Copying contact information into multiple contacts
Tip
You can also duplicate a
contact in the Contacts
desktop application by
highlighting a contact in
the Contacts list, and then
selecting Edit Copy.
Create a new contact,
click the Note tab, and
then paste the info into a
note. Then cut and paste
the text into the correct
field in the new contact.
Did You Know?
If you duplicate a contact
and do not edit the name,
the contact appears in the
Contacts list as “<Last
name>, <First name>
Copy.”
Zire™ 31 Handheld
You can quickly make a copy of a contact so that you can edit only the fields you need to change.
For example, if two of your contacts have the same work address or phone number, duplicating
the first contact simplifies entering information in the second.
0
1
Press the Contacts
2
Duplicate a contact:
application button.
a. Select the contact you want, and then select Edit.
b. Open the menus
.
c. Select Record, and then select Duplicate Contact.
Done
116
CHAPTER 7
Managing Your Contacts
Locating a contact on your list
Tip
You can also press Right
on the navigator (or tap
the Quick Look Up icon at
the top of the screen) to
open the Quick Look Up
line. Press Up and Down
to select the letter of the
name you want in each
box, and press Right to
move to the next box.
Did You Know?
The Phone Lookup
feature lets you add
contact information
directly into certain other
applications on your
handheld. For example,
you can add a name and
phone number to a
memo or task.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
0
1
Press the Contacts
2
Search for the contact:
application button.
a. Tap the Look Up line at the
bottom of the screen and
enter the first letter of the
name you want to find.
b. Enter the second letter of the
name, and so on, until you
can easily scroll to the contact
you want.
3
Select the contact to open it.
Done
117
CHAPTER 7
Managing Your Contacts
Deleting a contact
Tip
You never know when
you’re going to need to
look up an old business
associate. If you save an
archive copy of your
deleted contacts, you can
refer to them later by
importing them.
0
1
2
Press the Contacts
application button.
Open the Delete Contact dialog
box:
a. Locate the contact you want.
b. Open the menus
.
c. Select Delete Contact on the
Record menu.
3
4
[ & ] OPTIONAL
your computer.
Select the check box to save an archive copy of the contact on
Select OK.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
118
CHAPTER 7
Managing Your Contacts
Customizing the Contacts list
By default, the Contacts list displays the work phone number for a contact; if no work phone
number is entered, another entry is displayed. You can customize a contact’s settings to display
different information on the Contacts list.You can also customize the appearance of the list.
Did You Know?
If you select Work, Home,
Fax, Other, Main, Pager,
or Mobile from the pick
list, the first letter of your
selection appears next to
the contact in the
Contacts list—for
example, W for Work. If
you select E-mail, no
letter appears next to the
contact.
Tip
You can also use the
Contact Details dialog
box to assign a contact to
a category or to mark a
contact as private.
0
1
Press the Contacts
2
Open the Contact Details dialog box:
application button.
a. Select the contact you want.
b. Select Edit, and then select Details.
3
Specify the information
displayed with a contact:
a. Tap the Show in List pick list
and select the information
that you want to appear in the
Contacts list for this contact.
b. Select OK.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
119
CHAPTER 7
Managing Your Contacts
4
Customize the appearance of the Contacts list:
a. From the Contacts list, open the menus
.
b. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
c. Select the display options you want:
Remember last category Select the check box if you want Contacts to display
the last category shown when you return to it from another application. If the
check box is deselected, Contacts opens to the All category.
List by Select whether to sort the Contacts list by last name and first name or
by company and last name.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
120
CHAPTER 7
Managing Your Contacts
Working with Contacts on your computer
Use Contacts on your computer to view and manage the contacts you create on your handheld.
Check out the online Help in Palm® Desktop software to learn how to use Contacts on your
computer. The online Help includes info about the following topics:
• Viewing, copying, and deleting contacts
• Editing contact details
• Marking contacts private
• Showing, masking, and hiding private contacts
• Printing contacts
• Changing between the list, contact info, and Contact Edit views
• Adding notes to a contact
• Adding a date and time stamp to a contact
• Organizing contacts into categories
• Sharing contacts
WINDOWS ONLY
To open Contacts on your computer, double-click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop,
and then click Contacts on the launch bar.
MAC ONLY
To open Contacts on your computer, launch Palm Desktop software from the Palm folder, and then
click Addresses.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
121
CHAPTER 7
Managing Your Contacts
Related topics
My Handheld
Make your handheld
uniquely yours. For great
tips, software, accessories,
and more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
myzire31.
Support
If you’re having problems
with Contacts or with
anything else on your
handheld, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support/zire31.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Moving
Around
• Opening applications
• Using menus
Categories
Organizing contacts by type and sorting them
Information
Transferring contact information from other applications such as databases,
spreadsheets, and other organizer software
Privacy
Keeping contacts private by turning on security options
122
CHAPTER 8
Managing Your Calendar
In this chapter
Scheduling events
Color-coding your schedule
Setting an alarm
Rescheduling an event
Deleting events
Checking your schedule
Staying on top of your schedule is an
important part of being productive
both at work and at home. Calendar
can help you remember appointments
and spot schedule conflicts. You can
view your calendar by day, week, or
month, or as an agenda list that
combines your list of tasks with your
appointments.
Customizing your calendar
Working with Calendar on
your computer
Related topics
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Benefits of Calendar
• Track current, future, and past
appointments
• Stay on top of deadlines
• Carry one calendar
• Spot schedule conflicts
123
CHAPTER 8
Managing Your Calendar
Scheduling events
»
Key Term
Event The name for an
entry in the Calendar
application, including
appointments, birthdays,
reminders, recurring
meetings, and so on.
Use Calendar to manage your schedule. You can enter appointments, events without a start time,
events that repeat at regular intervals, and events that span a period of time.
Scheduling an appointment
0
1
Tip
You can also scroll to a
date by pressing Right or
Left on the navigator or
by tapping the arrows at
the top of the Day View
screen.
Did You Know?
You can use more than
one line to describe an
appointment.
Open Day View:
a. Press the Calendar
application button.
b. Tap the Day View icon
Day View icon
Go To
2
Select the date of the appointment:
a. Tap Go To.
b. Tap the arrows to select the year.
c. Tap the month.
d. Tap the date.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
124
CHAPTER 8
Did You Know?
You can color-code your
calendar to file events in
categories. Each category
has its own color. You can
also mark events as
private to hide them from
prying eyes.
Managing Your Calendar
3
Tap the line next to the time the appointment begins and enter a description.
4
If the appointment is longer or shorter than an hour, set the duration:
a. In Day View, tap the start time.
b. In the Set Time dialog box, tap End Time.
c. Tap the hour and minute lists to select the time the appointment ends.
d. Select OK.
Description
Start time
Duration
Category marker
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Hour
list
Minute
list
That’s it. Your handheld automatically saves the appointment.
Make sure you have a current backup. Synchronize often.
125
CHAPTER 8
Managing Your Calendar
Scheduling an event without a start time
Did You Know?
Need to reserve a date
before you know the
details of the
appointment? Schedule
an event without a start
time.
Keep track of events that take place on a particular date, but not at a particular time. For example,
you may want to enter holidays, anniversaries, and deadlines.
0
1
Open Day View:
a. Press the Calendar
application button.
b. Tap the Day View icon
Day View icon
Go To
2
Select the date of the event:
a. Tap Go To.
b. Tap the arrows to select the
year.
c. Tap the month.
d. Tap the date.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
126
CHAPTER 8
Tip
You can change an event
without a time to a
scheduled appointment.
Tap the event description,
tap Details, tap the Time
box, and select the start
and end times.
Managing Your Calendar
3
Add an unscheduled event line:
a. Tap New.
b. Tap No Time.
4
Enter a description on the line
that appears at the top of the
screen.
NOTE A diamond appears in
the time column to show that the
event doesn’t start at a specific
time.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
127
CHAPTER 8
Managing Your Calendar
Scheduling a repeating event—standard interval
Tip
To select intervals such as
the 2nd Tuesday of every
month or the 3rd
Thursday in November of
every year, see
Scheduling a repeating
event—unusual interval.
There’s no need to re-enter events that take place on a regular basis. Just set up a repeating event.
This is a great way to block out time for things like a daily walk with the dog, a weekly team
meeting, a monthly game night with friends, and annual events like anniversaries and holidays.
0
1
Press the Calendar
2
Enter the event you want to repeat, and then tap the event description.
3
Set the repeat interval:
application button.
a. Tap Details.
b. Tap the Repeat pick list and
select how often the event
repeats: Daily until, Every week,
Every other week, Every month,
or Every year.
NOTE If you select Daily a dialog box appears for you to select the end date.
c. Select OK.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
128
CHAPTER 8
Managing Your Calendar
Scheduling a repeating event—unusual interval
Some events don’t fit neatly into the preset repeat intervals, so you need to set up your own
repeat intervals. For example, set aside time for a trip to the gym every other day, schedule a class
that meets on the 1st Wednesday of each month, or enter annual holidays that occur during a
particular time of month such as the 1st Monday in September or the 3rd week of November.
0
1
Press the Calendar
2
Enter the event you want to repeat, and then tap the event description.
3
Open the Change Repeat dialog box:
application button.
a. Tap Details.
b. Tap the Repeat pick list and select Other.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
129
CHAPTER 8
Tip
To enter holidays such as
Labor Day or
Thanksgiving, tap Month,
enter 12 on the Every line,
and then tap Day as the
Repeat By setting.
Managing Your Calendar
4
Set the repeat interval:
a. Tap Day, Week, Month, or Year as the repeat unit.
b. Tap the Every line and enter the frequency at which the event repeats.
c. Tap the End on pick list and select an end date, if needed.
d. If you selected Week in step c, tap the day of the week the event repeats. If
you selected Month in step c, tap Day to select the week within the month,
such as the 4th Thursday, or tap Date to select the same date within the
month, such as the 15th.
e. Select OK.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
130
CHAPTER 8
Managing Your Calendar
Scheduling an event that is longer than a day
Did You Know?
Reserve a specific block
of time during the day or
use events without times
to flag a series of dates.
For example, you can
reserve vacation time
from 6/23 – 6/30 using a
repeating event without a
time, and then schedule a
specific excursion from
9:00 to 3:00 on 6/24 and
dinner with a friend at
6:00 on 6/25.
Tip
Need to enter an event
that extends beyond
midnight? Enter an end
time that is earlier than
the start time.
Reserve a block of time for events that span several days such as a vacation, conference, training
class, or an extended project.
0
1
Press the Calendar
2
Enter the event, and then tap the event description.
3
Set the repeat interval:
application button.
a. Tap Details.
b. Tap the Repeat pick list and
select Daily until.
c. Select the year, month, and date
when the event ends.
d. Select OK.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
131
CHAPTER 8
Managing Your Calendar
Entering a location or a note for an event
Enter a description of the event’s location such as a restaurant, a conference room, or your friend’s
house. Enter a note such as dial-in info for a conference call or directions to a location.
0
1
Press the Calendar
2
Enter the event, and then tap the event description.
3
[ & ] OPTIONAL
location:
application button.
Enter the
a. Tap Details.
b. Tap the Location field and enter
a description of the location.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
132
CHAPTER 8
Managing Your Calendar
4
[ & ] OPTIONAL
a. Tap Note
Enter the note:
.
b. Enter the note text.
c. Select Done.
5
Select OK.
Done
The location name and a note icon appear next to the event
description in Agenda View and in Day View.
Color-coding your schedule
Use color-coding to quickly spot different types of events. For example, make all your family
appointments green, your work appointments blue, and your appointments with friends yellow.
Selecting your color-codes
Each color-code represents a category of events. You can assign each category a name and select
which color you want to assign to it.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
133
CHAPTER 8
Managing Your Calendar
0
1
Open Day View:
a. Press the Calendar
application button.
b. Tap the Day View icon
2
Category
marker
Day View icon
Open the Edit Categories dialog box:
a. From Day View, tap the event
description.
b. Tap Details.
c. Tap the Category pick list and
select Edit Categories.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
134
CHAPTER 8
Managing Your Calendar
3
Select the color-code for the category:
a. Tap New or select a category and tap Edit.
b. Enter or edit the category name.
c. Tap the color you want to give this category.
d. Select OK, and then select OK two more times.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
The category name and its color-coded marker appear on the
category list.
135
CHAPTER 8
Managing Your Calendar
Assigning a color-code to an event
Did You Know?
In Day View and Month
View you can set the
Display Options to show
the category list so that
you can view all your
events or just the events
for a single color-code.
0
1
Press the Calendar
2
Enter the event you want to color-code.
3
application button.
Tap the category marker next to the description, and then select a category from
the list.
category
marker
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
In Agenda View and Day View the category marker next to the
event is color-coded. In Week View and Month View the symbol
for the event is color-coded.
136
CHAPTER 8
Managing Your Calendar
Setting an alarm
Tip
You can customize your
alarm settings in the
Calendar Preferences
dialog box.
Did You Know?
If you set your alarms in
World Clock instead of
Calendar, you have
different alarm sound
choices. Keep in mind
that since World Clock
alarms aren’t tied to a
specific event, you won’t
see an event description
when a World Clock alarm
sounds.
Did You Know?
When you set an alarm, a
little alarm clock appears
to the right of the event
description.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
0
1
2
3
Press the Calendar
application button.
Enter the event you want to assign an alarm to, and then tap the event
description.
Set the alarm:
a. Tap Details.
b. Tap the Alarm check box.
c. Tap the pick list and select
Minutes, Hours, or Days.
d. Enter how many minutes,
hours, or days before the
event you want the alarm to
sound, and then select OK.
Done
137
CHAPTER 8
Managing Your Calendar
Rescheduling an event
0
Tip
You can also use the
Event Details dialog box
to change the alarm,
location, category, repeat,
and privacy settings.
1
Press the Calendar
2
Go to the event you want to reschedule:
application button.
a. From Day View, tap Go To.
b. Select the year, month, and date of the event.
c. Tap the event description, and edit it if necessary.
[ ! ] IMPORTANT If you edit the description of a repeating event, the new
description appears in all instances of the event.
3
Change the date and time:
a. Tap Details.
b. Tap the Time box and select
the new start and end times.
c. Tap the Date box and select
the new date.
d. Select OK.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
138
CHAPTER 8
Managing Your Calendar
4
If you’re changing a repeating
event, tap one of the following to
select which event(s) you want to
apply the changes to:
Current Apply your changes to
only the selected instance of the
repeating event.
Future Apply your changes to the selected event and all instances of the
repeating event that occur at a later date.
All Apply your changes to the selected event and all past and future instances
of the repeating event.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
139
CHAPTER 8
Managing Your Calendar
Deleting events
Tip
You can also delete a
specific event by
selecting the event,
tapping Details, and then
tapping Delete.
If an appointment is cancelled, you can delete it from your schedule. When deleting a repeating
event, you can indicate whether you want to delete just the selected event, or to include other
instances of the event. You can also delete all your old events that are before a selected
timeframe.
Deleting a specific event
0
Tip
Many people find it useful
to refer to old events for
tax purposes. If you save
an archive copy of your
deleted events, you can
refer to them later by
importing them.
1
Press the Calendar
2
Go to the event you want to delete:
application button.
a. From Day View, tap Go To.
b. Select the year, month, and date of the event.
c. Tap the event description.
3
Open the Delete Event dialog
box:
a. Open the menus
.
b. Select Delete Event on the
Record menu.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
140
CHAPTER 8
Managing Your Calendar
4
5
6
[ & ] OPTIONAL
your computer.
Select the check box to save an archive copy of the event on
Select OK.
If you’re deleting a repeating
event, tap one of the following to
select which event(s) you want to
delete:
Current Delete only the selected
instance of the repeating event.
Future Delete the selected event
and all instances of the repeating event that occur at a later date.
All Delete the selected event and all past and future instances of the repeating
event.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
141
CHAPTER 8
Managing Your Calendar
Deleting all your old events
When you need more space on your handheld, or you just want to do some “housekeeping,” you
can delete all your old events.
0
1
Press the Calendar
2
Open the Purge dialog box:
a. Open the menus
application button.
.
b. Select Purge on the Record
menu.
3
Select which events to purge:
a. Tap the Delete events older than pick list and select a timeframe.
b. Select the Save archive copy on PC check box if you want to place a copy of
the deleted events in an archive file on your computer the next time you
synchronize.
c. Select OK.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
142
CHAPTER 8
Managing Your Calendar
Checking your schedule
Tip
Press the Calendar
application button
repeatedly to cycle
through the four different
views.
Tip
If you installed an e-mail
application, such as the
palmOne™ VersaMail™
application (sold
separately), you can
customize Agenda View
to show how many
unread messages you
have.
Sometimes you want to look at your schedule for a particular date, while other times you want to
see an overview of a week or month.
Viewing your appointments and tasks together
Agenda View shows your daily schedule and any items on your Tasks list that are overdue or due
today. If there’s room on the screen, Agenda View also shows your schedule for the next dates
that have events scheduled on them.
0
1
Press the Calendar
application button.
NOTE If Calendar is already open, tap the Agenda View icon
instead.
Continued
Did You Know?
You can use a favorite
photo as the background
for your Agenda View.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
143
CHAPTER 8
Managing Your Calendar
2
Do one of the following to view your schedule:
• Tap an appointment to go to it in Day View.
• Tap a task to go to it in Tasks.
Category marker
Location
No-time icon
Overdue task icon
Agenda View icon
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
144
CHAPTER 8
Managing Your Calendar
Viewing your daily schedule
Day View shows your daily schedule one day at a time. You can scroll between days in the current
week or jump to any other date.
0
1
Open Day View:
a. Press the Calendar
application button.
b. Tap the Day View icon
.
Day selector
Birthday icon
Alarm icon
No-time icon
Repeat icon
Event duration
Note icon
Category marker
Day View icon
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
145
CHAPTER 8
Managing Your Calendar
2
Do any of the following to view your daily schedule:
• Tap the day selector to view another day in the same week, tap the arrows to
scroll to the previous or next week, or tap Go To to choose a specific date.
• Tap the repeat icon, the alarm icon, or Details to open the Details dialog box.
• Tap the note icon to view the note text.
• Tap the birthday icon to view the birthday entry.
• Tap the category marker to assign the event to a color-code.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
146
CHAPTER 8
Managing Your Calendar
Viewing your weekly schedule
Tip
You can also press Right
and Left on the navigator
to scroll to the next or
previous week. To go to
Day View for a particular
day, press Select on the
navigator to insert a
highlight, press Right or
Left to select a day, and
then press Select on the
navigator again.
Did You Know?
Reschedule an event
within the same week by
dragging the event box to
the new time and day.
Week View shows your schedule for an entire week. The timeframes that appear on the screen are
based on the Start Time and End Time settings in Calendar Preferences.
0
1
Open Week View:
Week selector
Multi-day event
a. Press the Calendar
application button.
b. Tap the Week View icon
No-time icon
.
Event
Scroll arrows
After-hours event
Week View icon
2
Do any of the following to view your weekly schedule:
• Tap the week selector to scroll between weeks, or tap Go To to choose a week.
• Tap a date to go to that day in Day View.
• Tap an event to view the event description and location.
• Tap the scroll arrows to view events scheduled earlier or later in the day
during the selected week.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
147
CHAPTER 8
Managing Your Calendar
Viewing your monthly schedule
Tip
You can also press Right
and Left on the navigator
to scroll to the next or
previous month. To go to
Day View for a particular
date, press Select on the
navigator to insert a
highlight, press Right or
Left to select a date, and
then press Select on the
navigator again.
Month View shows your schedule for a whole month. You can scroll between months or jump to
any other month.
0
1
Open Month View:
Month selector
a. Press the Calendar
application button.
b. Tap the Month View icon
Event
.
No-time icon
Multi-day event
Month View icon
2
Do any of the following to view your monthly schedule:
• Tap the month selector to scroll to the previous or next month, or tap Go To to
choose a specific month.
• Tap a date to go to that day in Day View.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
148
CHAPTER 8
Managing Your Calendar
Finding events that overlap
When an event starts before a previous event finishes, the events overlap. You can spot events
that overlap in Week View and in Day View.
Overlapping
events
Customizing your calendar
Control the appearance of your Calendar screens. Choose display options for Agenda View, Day
View, and Month View. The options you choose for each View apply only to that View. You can also
choose alarm and start and end time settings.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
149
CHAPTER 8
Managing Your Calendar
Customizing display options for your calendar
[ ! ] Before You Begin
To use a photo as your
Agenda View
background, you must
first install palmOne™
Photos from the
installation CD onto your
handheld.
0
1
2
Press the Calendar
application button.
Open the Display Options dialog
box:
a. Open the menus
.
b. Select Options, and then
select Display Options.
3
Tap the Default View pick list and select the view you want to see when you
open Calendar.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
150
CHAPTER 8
Tip
If the text is difficult to see
against your new
background, select a
different Color Theme to
change the text color.
Tip
If you want to see the
hours when you have
nothing scheduled as well
as your appointments,
deselect Compress Day
View. But don’t forget to
scroll down to see the
events at the end of your
day.
Managing Your Calendar
4
Set any of the following Agenda View display options:
Show Due Tasks
Display tasks that are due today and tasks that are overdue.
Show Messages
Display the number of read and unread e-mail messages.
Background Use your favorite photo as the Agenda View background. Select
the Background check box, tap the photo thumbnail, and then select a photo.
Adjust the fade setting so that the text is easy to read against the photo.
5
Tap Day and set any of the
following Day View options:
Show Category List Display the
category pick list. By default, the
Category pick list doesn’t appear.
Show Time Bars Display the bars
that show the duration of an event
and event conflicts.
Compress Day View
scheduled events.
Avoid scrolling and display only the time period with
Show Category Column Display the category marker between the time and
description. The color of the category marker indicates which category the
event is filed under.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
151
CHAPTER 8
Managing Your Calendar
6
Tap Month and set any of the
following Month View options:
Show Category List Display the
category pick list. By default, the
Category pick list doesn’t appear.
Timed Events Show events that
are scheduled for a specific time.
Untimed Events Show events
that are scheduled for a specific date, but not a specific time.
Daily Repeating Events
7
Show events that repeat every day.
Select OK.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
152
CHAPTER 8
Managing Your Calendar
Setting alarm and time options
Tip
You can view and
schedule events in time
slots that are before or
after the start or end time.
You just need to scroll to
those time slots.
0.
1
Press the Calendar
2
Open the Preferences dialog box:
a. Open the menus
application button.
.
b. Select Options, and then
select Preferences.
3
Select the timeframes that appear in Day View and Week View:
a. Tap the arrows next to the Start Time box to set the time that your daily
schedule typically begins.
b. Tap the arrows next to the End Time box to set the time that your daily
schedule typically ends.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
153
CHAPTER 8
Managing Your Calendar
4
Set any of the following alarm settings:
Alarm Preset Set an alarm for each new event. When you select this check
box, you also need to enter the default number of minutes, days, or hours
before the event the alarm sounds. For events without a time, the alarm settings
are based on midnight of the date of the event. The Alarm Preset settings
appear as defaults for each new event, but you can change these settings in the
Details dialog box for individual events. If you don’t want to use alarms for
most of your events, don’t select this check box.
Alarm Sound
Select the sound the alarm makes when it goes off.
Remind Me Select how many times the alarm sounds after the first time it
goes off: Once, Twice, 3 Times, 5 Times, and 10 Times.
Play Every Select how often the alarm sounds: Minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes,
and 30 minutes.
5
Select OK.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
154
CHAPTER 8
Managing Your Calendar
Working with Calendar on your computer
Did You Know?
Mac Check out the
Holiday Files folder in the
Palm folder. It contains
various holidays that can
you import into
Palm Desktop software
on your computer.
Use Calendar on your computer to view and manage your schedule. Check out the online Help in
Palm® Desktop software to learn how to use Calendar on your computer. The online Help includes
info about the following topics:
• Scheduling events
• Rescheduling events
• Setting alarms
• Deleting events
• Marking events as private and hiding them
• Printing your schedule
• Working with Day View, Week View, Month View, and Year View
WINDOWS ONLY
To open Calendar on your computer, double-click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop,
and then click Calendar on the launch bar.
MAC ONLY
To open Calendar on your computer, double-click the Palm Desktop icon in the Palm folder, and
then click Date Book.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
155
CHAPTER 8
Managing Your Calendar
Related topics
My Handheld
Make your handheld
uniquely yours. For great
tips, software, accessories,
and more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
myzire31.
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Sharing
Beaming events to other Palm OS® handheld users
Privacy
Keeping events private by turning on security options
Categories
• Editing and deleting categories
• Viewing events by category
Support
If you’re having problems
with Calendar or with
anything else on your
handheld, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support/zire31.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Common
Questions
Answers to frequently asked questions about Calendar
156
CHAPTER 9
Managing Your Tasks
In this chapter
Creating a task
Organizing your tasks
Marking a task complete
Deleting tasks
Customizing your Tasks list
Some of the most successful people in
the world are also the busiest. When
asked how they manage to do it all,
busy people usually say, “I make lists.”
The Tasks application on your
handheld is the perfect place to make a
list of the things you need to do.
Working with Tasks on your
computer
Related topics
Benefits of Tasks
• Set priorities
• Track deadlines
• Stay focused
Zire™ 31 Handheld
157
CHAPTER 9
Managing Your Tasks
Creating a task
Tip
If no task is currently
selected, you can create a
new task by writing
Graffiti® 2 characters in
the input area.
0
1
Go to the Home
2
Create a task:
.
Due date
a. Tap New.
Tip
Add a note to a task. Tap
the Note button, enter the
note text, and then select
Done.
Did You Know?
You can organize your
tasks by filing them into
categories. You can also
mark tasks as private to
hide them from prying
eyes.
screen and select Tasks
b. Enter a description of the task.
Long description
New task
Priority number
Note button
3
[ & ] OPTIONAL
Assign a priority and due date:
a. Tap the priority number and select a number (1 is the most important).
b. Tap the due date and select a date from the list, or select Choose Date to
select a date from the calendar.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
That’s it. Your handheld automatically saves the task. Make sure
you have a current backup. Synchronize often.
158
CHAPTER 9
Managing Your Tasks
Setting an alarm
[ ! ] Before You Begin
Create a task and assign it
a due date. A task must
have a due date to set an
alarm.
Tip
You can customize the
alarm sound for your
tasks in the Task
Preferences dialog box.
0
1
Go to the Home
2
Open the Set Alarm dialog box:
screen and select Tasks
.
a. Tap the task you want to assign an alarm to.
b. Tap Details.
c. Tap the Alarm box.
Did You Know?
When you set an alarm, a
little alarm clock appears
to the right of the task
description.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
159
CHAPTER 9
Managing Your Tasks
3
Set the alarm:
a. Tap the Alarm check box.
b. Enter how many days before the due date you want the alarm to sound.
c. Tap the time columns to set the time the alarm sounds.
d. Select OK, and then select OK again.
Done
Scheduling a repeating task—standard interval
Tip
To select intervals such as
the 2nd Tuesday of every
month or the 3rd
Thursday in November of
every year, see
Scheduling a repeating
task—unusual interval.
Repeating tasks are a great way to add tasks that happen over and over again, like taking out the
trash every Thursday night or making monthly mortgage or rent payments.
0
1
Go to the Home
2
Enter the task you want to repeat and assign it a due date.
screen and select Tasks
.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
160
CHAPTER 9
Managing Your Tasks
3
Set the repeat interval:
a. Tap the task description, and
then tap Details.
b. Tap the Repeat pick list and
select how often the task
repeats: Daily until, Every week,
Every other week, Every month,
or Every year.
NOTE If you select Daily a dialog box appears for you to select the end date.
c. Select OK.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
161
CHAPTER 9
Managing Your Tasks
Scheduling a repeating task—unusual interval
For tasks that don’t fit neatly into the preset repeat intervals, you can set up your own repeat
intervals. For example, enter tasks for paying a quarterly insurance bill or a credit card bill that is
due every 28 days, or changing your smoke detector battery every six months.
0
1
Go to the Home
2
Enter the task you want to repeat and assign it a due date.
3
Open the Change Repeat dialog box:
screen and select Tasks
.
a. Tap Details.
b. Tap the Repeat pick list and select Other.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
162
CHAPTER 9
Tip
To schedule an annual
task, such as decorating
for a holiday on the first
Sunday of a particular
month, select Month as
the repeat unit, enter 12
on the Every line, and
then tap Day as the
Repeat By setting.
Managing Your Tasks
4
Set the repeat interval:
a. Tap Day, Week, Month, or Year as the repeat unit.
b. Tap Fixed Schedule to base the due date on the due date of the current task,
or tap After Completed to base the due date on the date you complete this
task. With this option if you complete this task early or late, the due date for
the next task adjusts accordingly.
c. Tap the Every line and enter the frequency at which the task repeats.
d. Tap the End on pick list and select an end date, if needed.
e. If you selected Fixed Schedule in step b and Week in step a, tap the day of
the week the task repeats. If you selected Fixed Schedule in step b and
Month in step a, tap Day to select the week within the month, such as the 4th
Thursday, or tap Date to select the same date within the month, such as the
15th.
f. Select OK.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
163
CHAPTER 9
Managing Your Tasks
Organizing your tasks
Did You Know?
Overdue tasks have an
exclamation point (!) next
to the due date.
Tip
Your Task Preferences
settings control which
tasks appear in the Tasks
list, such as completed or
due tasks. To change
these settings, open the
Options menu and select
Preferences.
Tip
Create a new category for
tasks by selecting Edit
Categories in the
Category pick list.
Sometimes you want to look at all the things you need to do, while at other times you want to see
only certain types of tasks.
0
1
Go to the Home
2
In the Tasks list, select one of these options:
screen and select Tasks
.
All Displays all your tasks.
Date Displays tasks that are due in a specific time frame. Tap the pick list in the
upper-right to select Due Today, Last 7 Days, Next 7 Days, or Past Due.
Category Displays tasks that are assigned to the selected category. Tap the
pick list in the upper-right to select a different category.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
164
CHAPTER 9
Managing Your Tasks
Marking a task complete
Tip
You can set Task
Preferences to record the
date that you finish your
tasks, and you can show
or hide finished tasks. To
change these settings,
open the Options menu
and select Preferences.
You can check off a task to indicate that you’ve completed it.
0
1
2
Go to the Home
screen and select Tasks
.
Select the check box on the left
side of the task.
Done
NOTE Palm® Desktop software and Microsoft Outlook handle completed repeating tasks
differently. Palm Desktop software checks off all overdue instances of the task, and Microsoft
Outlook checks off only the oldest instance of the task.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
165
CHAPTER 9
Managing Your Tasks
Deleting tasks
Tip
You can also delete a
specific task by selecting
the task, tapping Details,
and then tapping Delete.
If a task is cancelled, you can delete it from your Tasks list. When you delete a repeating task, you
delete all other instances of the task. You can also delete all your completed tasks.
Deleting a specific task
0
1
Go to the Home
2
Tap the task you want to delete.
3
Open the Delete Task dialog box:
screen and select Tasks
a. Open the menus
.
.
b. Select Delete Task on the
Record menu.
4
5
[ & ] OPTIONAL
your computer.
Select the check box to save an archive copy of the task on
Select OK.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
166
CHAPTER 9
Managing Your Tasks
Deleting all your completed tasks
Tip
Many people find it useful
to refer to old tasks for tax
purposes. If you save an
archive copy of your
deleted tasks, you can
refer to them later by
importing them.
0
1
Go to the Home
2
Open the Purge dialog box:
a. Open the menus
screen and select Tasks
.
.
b. Select Purge on the Record
menu.
3
4
[ & ] OPTIONAL Select the check box to save an archive copy of your
completed tasks on your computer.
Select OK.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
167
CHAPTER 9
Managing Your Tasks
Customizing your Tasks list
Tip
You can also display your
tasks in Calendar’s
Agenda View. See
Customizing display
options for your calendar
for details.
Control which tasks show up in the Tasks list and how they are sorted. These settings also affect
tasks in Calendar’s Agenda View. You can also choose the alarm sound for your tasks.
0
1
Go to the Home
2
Open the Preferences dialog box:
a. Open the menus
screen and select Tasks
.
.
b. Select Options, and then
select Preferences.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
168
CHAPTER 9
Managing Your Tasks
3
Change any of the following settings, and then select OK:
Sort by Select the order in which the tasks appear in the Tasks list.
Show Completed Tasks Display your finished tasks in the Tasks list. If you turn
off this setting, your finished tasks disappear from the list when you check them
off, but they stay in your handheld’s memory until you purge them.
Record Completion Date Replace the due date you assign to a task with the
date you really complete and check off the task. If you don’t assign a due date to
a task, the completion date still records when you complete the task.
Show Due Dates Display each task’s due date in the list (if you assigned one),
and display an exclamation point next to each task that is overdue.
Show the priority setting for each task in the list.
Show Priorities
Show Categories
Alarm Sound
Show the category for each task in the list.
Select a sound for the alarms you assign to your tasks.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
169
CHAPTER 9
Managing Your Tasks
Working with Tasks on your computer
Use Tasks on your computer to view and manage your tasks. Check out the online Help in
Palm Desktop software to learn how to use Tasks on your computer. The online Help includes info
about the following topics:
• Learning about the parts of the Tasks window
• Entering, editing, and deleting tasks
• Creating repeating tasks
• Marking tasks private
• Showing, masking, and hiding private tasks
• Assigning tasks to categories
• Printing your task list
• Selecting how to view tasks
• Sorting tasks by due date, priority level, or categories
WINDOWS ONLY
To open Tasks on your computer, double-click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop,
and then click Tasks on the launch bar.
MAC ONLY
To open Tasks on your computer, double-click the Palm Desktop icon in the Palm folder, and then
click To Dos.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
170
CHAPTER 9
Managing Your Tasks
Related topics
My Handheld
Make your handheld
uniquely yours. For great
tips, software, accessories,
and more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
myzire31.
Support
If you’re having problems
with Tasks or with anything
else on your handheld, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support/zire31.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Sharing
Beaming tasks to other Palm OS® handheld users
Privacy
Keeping tasks private by turning on security options
Categories
Organizing tasks by type
Common
Questions
Answers to frequently asked questions about Tasks
171
CHAPTER 10
Writing Memos
In this chapter
Creating a memo
Viewing and editing a memo
Moving memos in your
memos list
Deleting a memo
Working with Memos on
your computer
Related topics
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Your handheld contains applications
for storing the most common types of
information: contact names and
numbers, appointments, and so on.
Memos is the tool to use for capturing
information that is meaningful to you
but does not fall into one of these
categories. From meeting notes to
recipes and favorite quotations,
Memos provides a quick and easy way
to enter, store, and share your
important information.
Benefits of Memos
• Store essential but hard-to-remember
information
• Easily retrieve and share information
172
CHAPTER 10
Writing Memos
Creating a memo
Tip
In the Memos list, you
can also just start writing
to create a new memo.
The first letter is
automatically capitalized.
0
1
Go to the Home
2
Create a memo:
screen and select Memos
.
a. Select New.
Tip
Use Phone Lookup to
quickly add a name and
phone number to a
memo.
b. Enter your memo. Tap Enter on the onscreen keyboard or draw the
Graffiti® 2 writing Return stroke to move to a new line in the memo.
c. Select Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
That’s it. Your handheld automatically saves the memo. Make sure
you have a current backup. Synchronize often.
173
CHAPTER 10
Writing Memos
Viewing and editing a memo
Tip
The Memos list shows
the first line of each
memo, so make sure that
first line is something you
will recognize.
Did You Know?
You can connect your
handheld to a portable
keyboard and type your
memos on the go without
carrying around a heavy
laptop. You can purchase
a variety of portable
keyboards. Visit
www.palmOne.com/
myzire31 and click the
Accessories link.
Tip
You can change the size
of the text in Memos to
enhance readability.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
0
1
Go to the Home
2
View or edit the memo:
screen and select Memos
.
a. In the Memos list, select the memo you want.
b. Read or edit the memo, and then select Done.
Done
174
CHAPTER 10
Writing Memos
Moving memos in your memos list
Did You Know?
If you use Palm® Desktop
software for
synchronizing, you can
send a memo to your
computer by
synchronizing, and then
open the memo on your
computer in an
application such as
Microsoft Word for
further editing,
formatting, and so on.
Right-click the memo on
your computer, click Send
To, and then select the
application to which you
want to send the memo.
You can move memos up or down in your memos list. For example, you might want to keep all
memos on a certain topic grouped together.
0
1
Go to the Home
2
Move a memo:
screen and select Memos
.
a. Locate the memo you want.
b. Move the memo up or down by dragging the stylus across the screen.
A black dotted line appears to represent the memo you are moving.
c. When the line is in the location you want for your memo, lift the stylus.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
175
CHAPTER 10
Writing Memos
Deleting a memo
Tip
Need to retrieve that
holiday recipe you
stored? If you save an
archive copy of your
deleted memos, you can
refer to them later by
importing them.
0
1
2
Go to the Home
screen and select Memos
.
Open the Delete Memo dialog
box:
a. Locate the memo you want.
b. Open the menus
.
c. Select Delete Memo on the
Record menu.
3
4
[ & ] OPTIONAL
your computer.
Select the check box to save an archive copy of the memo on
Select OK.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
176
CHAPTER 10
Writing Memos
Working with Memos on your computer
Use Memos on your computer to view and manage the memos you create on your handheld.
Check out the online Help in Palm® Desktop software to learn how to use Memos on your
computer. The online Help includes info about the following topics:
• Viewing, copying, and deleting memos
• Editing memo details
• Marking memos private
• Showing, masking, and hiding private memos
• Printing memos
• Changing between the list and single memo views
• Adding a date and time stamp to a memo
• Organizing memos into categories
• Sorting memos
• Sharing memos
WINDOWS ONLY
To open Memos on your computer, double-click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop,
and then click Memos on the launch bar.
MAC ONLY
To open Memos on your computer, launch Palm Desktop software from the Palm folder, and then
select Memos.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
177
CHAPTER 10
Writing Memos
Related topics
My Handheld
Make your handheld
uniquely yours. For great
tips, software, accessories,
and more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
myzire31.
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Entering
Information
Adding a phone number or other contact information to a memo using Phone
Lookup
Support
If you’re having problems
with Memos or with anything
else on your handheld, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support/zire31.
Categories
Organizing memos by arranging them into categories and sorting them
Privacy
Keeping memos private by turning on security options
Sharing
Beaming memos to other Palm OS® handheld users
Common
Questions
Answers to frequently asked questions about Memos
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Moving
Around
• Opening applications
• Using menus
178
CHAPTER 11
Writing Notes in Note Pad
In this chapter
Creating a note
Viewing and editing a note
Deleting a note
Working with Note Pad on
your computer
Related topics
Need to jot down a phone number or a
reminder to yourself? Avoid fumbling
for scraps of paper, and write
important reminders in Note Pad. You
can use Note Pad to do everything you
might do with a piece of paper and a
pencil. Note Pad gives you a place to
draw freehand and take notes in your
personal handwriting, which is even
faster and more flexible than creating a
memo on your handheld.
Benefits of Note Pad
•
•
•
•
Zire™ 31 Handheld
No learning curve
Capture information in the moment
A picture is worth a thousand words
See reminders when you set alarms
179
CHAPTER 11
Writing Notes in Note Pad
Creating a note
[ ! ] Before You Begin
Make sure full-screen
writing is turned off. You
cannot create or edit
notes in Note Pad when
full-screen writing is on.
0
1
Go to the Home
2
Create a note:
a. Use the stylus to write your
note directly on the handheld
screen.
Tip
Tap the pen selector to
change the pen width or
to select the eraser. To
clear the screen
completely, tap the note
(anywhere but the title),
open the Edit menu and
select Clear Note.
Did You Know?
Prevent others from
viewing your notes by
marking them as private.
b. Select the time at the top of
the screen and enter a title
using Graffiti® 2 writing or
the onscreen keyboard.
3
.
Category box
Time or title
Scroll bar
Pen selector
Eraser
[ & ] OPTIONAL Assign the note to a category by tapping the Category box in
the upper-right corner, and then selecting a category.
4
Select Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
screen and select Note Pad
That’s it. Your handheld automatically saves the note. Make sure
you have a current backup. Synchronize often.
180
CHAPTER 11
Writing Notes in Note Pad
Choosing the pen and paper (background) colors
0
0
1
Go to the Home
2
Open the Select Colors dialog box:
screen and select Note Pad
.
a. Select Done to display the Note Pad list.
b. Open the menus
.
c. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
d. Tap Color.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
181
CHAPTER 11
Writing Notes in Note Pad
3
Select the pen and paper colors:
a. Tap Pen, and then tap the ink color you want to use.
b. Tap Paper, and then tap the background color you want to use.
c. Select OK, and then select OK again.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
182
CHAPTER 11
Writing Notes in Note Pad
Setting an alarm
Tip
Change the alarm sound
by opening the Options
menu, selecting
Preferences, and then
selecting a sound from
the Alarm Sound pick list.
To use a note as a reminder, set an alarm for that note.
0
1
Go to the Home
2
Open the note:
screen and select Note Pad
.
a. Select Done to display the Note Pad list.
b. Select the note you want to set an alarm for.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
183
CHAPTER 11
Tip
You can also open the Set
Alarm dialog box by
selecting a note and
tapping the right edge of
the screen next to the
note title.
Writing Notes in Note Pad
3
Set the alarm:
a. Open the menus
.
b. Select Options, and then select Alarm.
c. Tap the Date box, and then tap the year, month, and date you want the alarm
to sound.
d. Tap the time you want the alarm to sound.
e. Select OK.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
184
CHAPTER 11
Writing Notes in Note Pad
Viewing and editing a note
Tip
Sort the Note Pad list
alphabetically, by date, or
manually. Open the
Options menu, select
Preferences, and then tap
the Sort by pick list.
0
1
Go to the Home
2
Open the note:
screen and select Note Pad
.
a. Select Done to display the Note Pad list.
If you sort manually, you
can rearrange the list by
dragging notes to
another position in the
list.
b. Select the note you want to view or edit.
3
Read or edit the note, and then select Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
185
CHAPTER 11
Writing Notes in Note Pad
Deleting a note
Tip
You can also Delete a
note by opening the
Record menu and
selecting Delete Note.
0
1
Go to the Home
2
Open the note:
Tip
Want to get rid of those
deletion confirmation
messages? Open the
Options menu, select
Preferences, and then
uncheck the Confirm note
delete check box.
screen and select Note Pad
.
a. Select Done to display the Note Pad list.
b. Select the note you want to delete.
3
Select Delete, and then select OK to confirm deletion.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
186
CHAPTER 11
Writing Notes in Note Pad
Working with Note Pad on your computer
Use Note Pad on your computer to view and manage the handwritten notes you create on your
handheld. Check out the online Help in Palm® Desktop software to learn how to use Note Pad on
your computer. The online Help includes info about the following topics:
• Learning about the parts of the Note Pad window
• Viewing, copying, and deleting notes
• Editing note details and titles
• Setting an alarm for a note
• Marking notes private
• Showing, masking, and hiding private notes
• Printing notes
• Changing between the List and note Preview views
• Sorting notes
• Sharing notes
WINDOWS ONLY
To open Note Pad on your computer, double-click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop,
and then click Note Pad on the launch bar.
MAC ONLY
To open Note Pad on your computer, double-click the Note Pad icon in the Palm folder.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
187
CHAPTER 11
Writing Notes in Note Pad
Related topics
My Handheld
Make your handheld
uniquely yours. For great
tips, software, accessories,
and more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
myzire31.
Support
If you’re having problems
with Note Pad or with
anything else on your
handheld, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support/zire31.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Moving
Around
• Opening applications
• Using menus
Sharing
Beaming notes to other Palm OS® handheld users
Privacy
Keeping notes private by turning on security options
Categories
Creating categories so you can organize notes
Common
Questions
Answers to frequently asked questions about Notes
188
CHAPTER 12
Performing Calculations
In this chapter
Calculator buttons
Viewing recent calculations
Related topics
Whether you’re figuring the tip on a
restaurant bill, or balancing your
checkbook, it’s always nice to have a
calculator on hand. And because it’s
part of your handheld, there’s no need
to carry a separate calculator.
Benefits of Calculator
• Always have a calculator with you
• Store calculations for later use
Zire™ 31 Handheld
189
CHAPTER 12
Performing Calculations
Calculator buttons
0
Tip
Use the memory buttons
to store and recall a
number you enter in
multiple calculations.
Tip
If you make a mistake
entering a number in the
middle of a calculation,
use the CE button to
re-enter the number
without starting the
calculation over.
Clear any value in the Calculator memory.
Recall the stored value from the memory and enter it into the current
calculation.
Place the current number into memory. The current number is added
to the total that is already in the memory. Tapping this button does
not affect the current calculation; it just places the value in memory.
Clear the last number you entered.
Clear the entire calculation so that you can start over.
Enter a number, and then tap this button to change it to a
percentage.
Enter a number, and then tap this button to calculate the square root
of the number.
Enter a number, and then tap this button to make it negative.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
190
CHAPTER 12
Performing Calculations
Viewing recent calculations
Did You Know?
Viewing recent
calculations is helpful
when double-checking
the math in your
checkbook register.
Did You Know?
Calculator History also
has these functions:
View recent calculations to confirm that you entered everything correctly.
0
1
Go to the Home
2
Open the History dialog box:
a. Open the menus
screen and select Calculator
.
Clear Tap here to clear
the calculator’s history.
b. Select Options, and then
select Show History.
Copy Tap here to copy
the history of
calculations. Then paste
them into another
application by opening
the Edit menu and
selecting Paste in the
other application.
c. Select OK.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
.
Done
191
CHAPTER 12
Performing Calculations
Related topics
Community
To explore the world of your
handheld, go to
www.palmOne.com/
myzire31.
Support
If you’re having problems
with Calculator or anything
else on your handheld, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support/zire31.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Click the links below to learn about these related topics:
Moving around
• Opening applications
• Using menus
Entering
information
Entering numbers with Graffiti® 2 characters
192
CHAPTER 13
Managing Your Expenses
In this chapter
Adding an expense
Choosing currency options
Deleting expenses
Tired of trying to re-create your
business trip when you return?
Expense makes it easy to keep track of
what you paid for that dinner in New
York with your new sales group.
Customizing the expense list
Working with Expense on
your computer
Related topics
You can track costs for meals, lodging,
transportation, entertainment, and
more, and save all of the information in
one convenient place. You can even
transfer the information to a
spreadsheet on your computer.
Benefits of Expense
• Monitor your business and personal
expenses
• Easily retrieve expense information
• Create expense reports faster
Zire™ 31 Handheld
193
CHAPTER 13
Managing Your Expenses
Adding an expense
Did You Know?
Expense is not just for
business. Use it to help
plan your budget by
figuring out how much
you spend each month on
things like entertainment
and dining out.
Tip
Add an expense simply
by writing the first letter
of the expense type. For
example, entering D
opens a dinner item with
today’s date.
To enable this feature on
your handheld, open the
Options menu and select
Preferences. Check the
automatic fill box.
Tip
Change the date of an
expense by tapping the
date of the item.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
0
1
Go to the Home
2
Enter the expense:
screen and select Expense
.
a. Tap New.
b. Enter the amount of the expense.
c. Tap the Expense type pick list and select a type.
NOTE You must select an Expense type if you want to save the item.
Expense
type pick list
Continued
194
CHAPTER 13
Tip
Add extra information to
your expense items.
Select the item and tap
Details. Then tap Note
and enter the
information.
Managing Your Expenses
3
Enter the details of the expense:
a. Tap Details.
b. Tap each field where you want to
enter information, and enter it.
Tip
Tap Lookup in the
Attendees list to pull
names from Contacts.
Category Select a category to sort
your expenses.
Did You Know?
After you synchronize,
you can send your
expense information to a
spreadsheet on your
computer.
Payment
Select how you paid for the expense.
Currency
symbol.
Select the currency used to pay the expense. You can preset this
Type
Enter the expense type.
Vendor and City Enter the vendor and city associated with the expense. For
example, a business lunch might be at Rosie’s Cafe in San Francisco.
Attendees
Enter the people associated with the expense.
c. Select OK.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
That’s it. Your handheld automatically saves the expense. Make
sure you have a current backup. Synchronize often.
195
CHAPTER 13
Managing Your Expenses
Choosing currency options
Expense is even easier to use when you customize the currency list. You can choose what
currencies appear in the pick list, what symbol automatically appears in new expenses, and even
create your own currency symbol.
Customizing the currency pick list
Place the currency symbols that you use most often in the currency pick list.
0
Tip
If you travel a lot, update
the currency pick list, so
that you can quickly get to
the symbols you need.
Did You Know?
Use separate categories
for related expenses. For
example, create a London
category for a trip to
London. After you file
your expense report for
the London trip, you can
easily delete the related
expenses with the Purge
command.
1
Go to the Home
2
Open the Receipt Details dialog box:
screen and select Expense
.
a. Tap an expense item.
b. Tap Details.
3
Select the currency symbol(s)
that you want to see in the pick
list:
a. Tap the Currency pick list, and
then select Edit currencies.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
196
CHAPTER 13
Managing Your Expenses
Cont’d.
b. Tap one of the Currency pick
lists and select the name of
the country whose currency
symbol you want to display.
Currency
pick list
c. Select OK, and then select OK
again.
Done
The expense list now displays the currencies you selected.
Presetting the currency symbol
Tip
If you’re entering several
expenses that all use the
same currency, change
the preset currency to
that symbol to save time.
When you’re finished
with those expenses,
change it again to the
next one you’ll use.
Choose which currency symbols appear when you add a new expense.
0S
1
Go to the Home
2
Open Expense Preferences dialog box:
a. Open the menus
screen and select Expense
.
.
b. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
197
CHAPTER 13
Managing Your Expenses
3
Choose the default currency:
a. Tap the Default Currency pick
list.
b. Select the symbol you want to
appear when you add new
expenses.
c. Select OK.
0
Done
Creating a currency symbol
If the currency you want to use is not in the pick list of countries, you can create your own symbol.
0
1
Go to the Home
2
Open the Custom Currencies dialog box:
a. Open the menus
screen and select Expense
.
.
b. Select Options, and then select Custom Currencies.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
198
CHAPTER 13
Managing Your Expenses
3
Create the custom symbol:
a. Tap a Country box.
b. Enter the name of the country
and the symbol that you want.
c. Select OK, and then select OK
again.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
199
CHAPTER 13
Managing Your Expenses
Deleting expenses
Delete individual expenses, or an entire category of expenses at once.
Deleting an individual expense
0
1
Go to the Home
2
Select the expense you want to delete.
3
Delete the item:
a. Open the menus
screen and select Expense
.
.
b. Select Delete Item on the Record menu.
4
5
[ & ] OPTIONAL Select the check box to save an archive copy of the expense
on your computer.
Select OK.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
200
CHAPTER 13
Managing Your Expenses
Deleting an entire category of expenses
Tip
To combine expenses
from different categories,
rename one category to
match the other
category’s name.
Did You Know?
There is another way to
delete a category. Tap the
Category pick list and
select Edit Categories.
Tap the Delete command
to delete the selected
category and move all of
its entries to the Unfiled
category.
0
1
2
Go to the Home
screen and select Expense
.
Open the Purge Categories
dialog box:
a. Open the menus
.
b. Select Purge on the Record
menu.
3
Delete the category and all of its items:
a. Tap the category you want to delete.
b. Tap Purge.
c. Select Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
201
CHAPTER 13
Managing Your Expenses
Customizing the expense list
You can change the appearance of the expense list.
Did You Know?
Customizing the expense
list makes it easy to see
how much you spent on
each type of expense. For
example, to see how
much you spent on taxis,
sort your expenses by
type so that all your taxi
expenses appear
together in the list.
Use categories to further
refine your list.
0
1
Go to the Home
2
Tap Show.
3
screen and select Expense
.
Tap the pick lists to change any of the following
items, and then select OK.:
Sort by Sort expenses by date or type.
Distance Show distance in miles or
kilometers.
Show currency Show or hide the currency
symbol in the expense list.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
202
CHAPTER 13
Managing Your Expenses
Working with Expense on your computer
WINDOWS ONLY
Use Expense on your computer to view and manage the expenses you create on your handheld.
Check out the online Help in Palm® Desktop software to learn how to use Expense on your
computer. The online Help includes info about the following topics:
• Add, edit, and delete expense items
• Organize your expenses by date, type, amount, notes, or category
• View expense items as a list, large icons, or small icons
• Convert a list of expenses to a single currency
• Print expense reports
• Transfer expense information to other applications, such as Microsoft Excel, using the Send or
Export command in Palm Desktop software.
To open Expense on your computer, double-click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop,
and then click Expense on the launch bar.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
203
CHAPTER 13
Managing Your Expenses
Related topics
Community
To explore the world of your
handheld, go to
www.palmOne.com/
myzire31.
Support
If you’re having problems
with Expense or anything
else on your handheld, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support/zire31.
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Moving around
• Opening applications
• Using menus
Entering
information
• Adding contacts to the attendees list with Lookup
• Entering information with Graffiti® 2 characters and shortcuts
Calculator
Performing basic math calculations associated with your expenses
Categories
• Creating and editing categories
• Organizing expenses by type and sorting them
Customizing
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Setting number formats
204
CHAPTER 14
Listening to Music
In this chapter
Transferring MP3 files to an
expansion card
Transferring music from a CD
to an expansion card
Playing music on your
handheld
Managing playlists
Viewing song info
Working with RealOne Player
on your computer
Related topics
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Are you tired of listening to small talk
during that long commute on the bus
or train? Do you need something
smaller than a CD player when you’re
out for a walk or at the gym? RealOne
Mobile Player lets you play music on
your handheld. Simply transfer songs
onto an expansion card (sold
separately), and then listen through the
built-in speaker or stereo headphones
(sold separately).
[ ! ] IMPORTANT You need to purchase an SD
or MultiMediaCard expansion card to save
your music files and play them on your
handheld.
Benefits of
RealOne Mobile Player
• Listen to songs in the popular MP3
format
• No separate MP3, CD, or mini-disc
player required
• Carry tiny expansion cards instead
of CDs
• Be your own DJ
205
CHAPTER 14
Listening to Music
Transferring MP3 files to an expansion card
[ ! ] Before You Begin
Windows Install the
RealOne Player
application on your
handheld and your
computer.
Tip
You can also use a card
reader accessory (sold
separately) to transfer
MP3 files from your
computer to your
expansion card. Create an
“SD_Audio” folder in the
root directory of the card,
and store your MP3 files
in this folder.
The RealOne software that comes with your handheld is compatible with the popular MP3 audio
file format. If your MP3 files are already on your computer’s hard drive, you need to transfer them
to an expansion card to listen to them on your handheld.
WINDOWS ONLY
0
1
Prepare your computer and your handheld:
a. Connect your handheld to your computer with the HotSync® cable.
b. Insert an expansion card into your handheld.
2
Select the MP3 files you want to transfer:
a. From My Computer or Windows Explorer,
select the MP3 files you want to transfer.
b. Drag and drop the file(s) or folder onto the palmOne™
Quick Install icon on the Windows desktop.
c. When the confirmation dialog box appears, confirm your username, the file
name, and the destination (card), and then click OK.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
206
CHAPTER 14
Listening to Music
3
Synchronize your handheld with your computer.
NOTE Be patient; transferring music to an expansion card can take several
minutes.
[ ! ] Before You Begin
Mac Install the RealOne
Player application on your
handheld.
Done
MAC ONLY
Tip
You can also use a card
reader accessory (sold
separately) to transfer MP3
files from your computer to
your expansion card.
Create an “SD_Audio”
folder in the root directory
on the card, and store your
MP3 files in this folder.
Tip
In Mac OS X, you can make
the Send To Handheld
droplet a permanent part
of your desktop by
dragging the droplet to the
Dock. Then simply drag
songs, and other files you
want to transfer to your
handheld, onto the droplet
in the Dock.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
0
1
Prepare your computer and your handheld:
a. Connect your handheld to your computer with the HotSync cable.
b. Insert an expansion card into your handheld.
2
Select the MP3 files you want to transfer:
a. Drag and drop the MP3 files onto the Send To
Handheld droplet in the Palm folder.
b. In the Send To Handheld dialog box, select your
username and click OK.
Continued
207
CHAPTER 14
Listening to Music
3
Synchronize your handheld with your computer.
NOTE Be patient; transferring music to an expansion card can take several
minutes.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
208
CHAPTER 14
Listening to Music
Transferring music from a CD to an expansion card
If your songs are on a CD and you want to listen to them on your handheld, use RealOne Player on
your computer to convert and transfer the files.
WINDOWS ONLY
0
1
Access the CD from RealOne Player on your computer:
a. Double-click the RealOne Player icon
on your computer desktop.
b. Insert the CD into your computer’s CD drive.
c. Click CD in RealOne Player on your computer.
CD
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
209
CHAPTER 14
Tip
If you want to select only
a few songs, click
Deselect All, and then
click the check box next to
the songs you want to
select.
Listening to Music
2
Select the songs you want to add to your library:
a. Click Save Tracks.
b. Follow the onscreen instructions to select and copy tracks.
Did You Know?
A 64MB expansion card
holds about an hour of
music (capacity varies
with sampling rates).
Save Tracks
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
210
CHAPTER 14
Tip
For tips on using RealOne
Player on your computer,
go to the Help menu in
RealOne Player or visit
www.realone.com.
Listening to Music
3
Prepare your handheld:
a. Insert an expansion card into your handheld.
b. Go to the Home
screen and select RealOne
.
c. Connect your handheld to your computer with the HotSync cable.
[ ! ] IMPORTANT Do not tap the HotSync icon.
4
Select the songs you want to transfer:
a. In RealOne Player on your computer, click Devices.
b. If necessary, double-click Palm Handheld, and then double-click Card.
c. Click Add Clips.
Add
Clips
Devices
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
211
CHAPTER 14
Tip
On your handheld, tap
Songs to view a list of the
songs available for you to
play. The songs you just
transferred are at the
bottom of the list.
Listening to Music
Cont’d.
d. In the Add Clips window, select the songs you want to add, and then click
Add Clips.
Add Clips
e. Click Close. The tracks you selected should now say “Ready To Transfer.”
5
Transfer the selected songs to your expansion card:
a. Be sure your handheld is on, that you have an expansion card in the
expansion slot, and that RealOne Mobile Player is open (if it is, a green
Connected light appears in the lower-left corner of the RealOne Player
window on your computer).
b. In the toolbar below the Connected light, click Transfer. When the transfer is
complete, the tracks you selected should say “On Device.”
[ ! ] IMPORTANT Do not tap the HotSync icon. RealOne Player is transferring
the files, so there’s no need to do anything.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
212
CHAPTER 14
Listening to Music
Playing music on your handheld
Tip
If RealOne Mobile Player
reaches the preset period
of inactivity before you
exit the application, the
screen turns off and the
music continues playing.
To set the period of
inactivity, open the
Options menu and select
Preferences. Select an
option from the Autopowersave after pick list,
and then select OK. If you
exit RealOne Mobile
Player, it turns off when it
reaches the period of
inactivity defined in
Power Preferences.
Tip
Want to stop playing
music when you exit
RealOne Mobile Player?
Open the Options menu
and select Preferences.
Deselect the Enable
Background Playback
check box, and then select
OK.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
0
1
On your handheld, go to the Home
2
Select a song to play:
screen and select RealOne
.
• To play the current song, tap Play.
• To play a different song, tap Songs and select a song from the list.
Continuous play
Progress indicator
Random play
Play/Pause
Volume
Stop
Previous song
Done
Next song
RealOne Mobile Player continues playing until it reaches the end
of your list. It stops playing if you tap Stop or turn off your
handheld.
213
CHAPTER 14
Listening to Music
Managing playlists
You can create as many playlists as you want.
Creating a playlist
Tip
For tips on using RealOne
Mobile Player, open the
Options menu and select
Help.
0
1
On your handheld, go to the Home
2
Open the Edit Playlist dialog box:
screen and select RealOne
.
a. Tap Playlists.
b. Tap New.
3
Enter a name for the playlist.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
214
CHAPTER 14
Tip
To quickly select all the
songs in the list, tap
Select All. To quickly
unselect all the songs, tap
Select None.
Listening to Music
4
Add songs to the playlist:
a. Tap Add.
b. Select the check box next to
the songs you want to include
on the playlist.
c. Tap Done.
5
Put the songs in the order you
want to hear them:
a. Tap a song you want to move.
b. Tap the up or down arrow to
move the song up or down
one slot.
c. Repeat this process until the
songs are in the right order.
Up arrow
Down arrow
d. Tap Done.
6
Tap Done, and then tap Done again.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
215
CHAPTER 14
Listening to Music
Playing songs from a playlist
0
1
On your handheld, go to the Home
2
Select a song from a playlist:
screen and select RealOne
.
a. Tap Playlists.
b. Tap the playlist you want to
play.
c. Tap the first song you want to
play.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Your handheld plays the songs in the playlist beginning with the
song you selected. After it plays the last song in the list, it stops.
216
CHAPTER 14
Listening to Music
Editing a playlist
0
1
On your handheld, go to the Home
2
Open the playlist you want to edit:
screen and select RealOne
.
a. Tap Playlists.
b. Tap the playlist you want to edit.
c. Tap Edit.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
217
CHAPTER 14
Listening to Music
3
Tap Edit and do any of the following:
Delete a song
playlist.
Add a song
Select a song and tap Remove to delete the song from the
Tap Add, select a song’s check box, and then tap Done.
Move a song Select a song and tap the up arrow or down arrow to move the
song up or down one slot.
4
Tap Done, and then tap Done two more times.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
218
CHAPTER 14
Listening to Music
Deleting a playlist
0
1
On your handheld, go to the Home
2
Open the playlist you want to delete:
screen and select RealOne
.
a. Tap Playlists.
b. Tap the playlist you want to delete.
3
Delete the list:
a. Tap Delete List.
b. Tap Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
c. Tap Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
219
CHAPTER 14
Listening to Music
Viewing song info
You can view details for the song that is currently playing.
0
1
On your handheld, go to the Home
2
Select a song to play and view:
screen and select RealOne
.
• To play and view the current
song, tap Play.
• To play and view a different
song, tap Songs and select a
song from the list.
3
Open the Song Details dialog
box:
a. Open the menus
.
b. Select Song Details on the
Music menu.
c. After you finish viewing the
info, select Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
220
CHAPTER 14
Listening to Music
Working with RealOne Player on your computer
WINDOWS ONLY
Use RealOne Player on your computer to play and manage your songs. Check out the online Help
in RealOne Player to learn how to use RealOne Player on your computer. The online Help includes
info about the following topics:
• Learning about the parts of the RealOne window
• Finding media
• Playing media
• Saving and burning media
• RealOne premium services
• Preferences
• Troubleshooting
To open RealOne Player on your computer, double-click the RealOne Player icon on the Windows
desktop.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
221
CHAPTER 14
Listening to Music
Related topics
My Handheld
Make your handheld
uniquely yours. For great
tips, software, accessories,
and more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
myzire31.
Support
If you’re having problems
with RealOne Mobile Player
or RealOne Player on your
computer, go to
www.realone.com.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Click the link below to learn about these related topics:
Expansion
Cards
• Inserting and removing expansion cards
• Naming expansion cards
• Viewing the contents of a card
Installing
and
Removing
• Installing the RealOne software on your handheld and computer
Common
Questions
Answers to frequently asked questions about RealOne Mobile Player
• Using Palm Quick Install and the Send To Handheld droplet
222
CHAPTER 15
Viewing Photos
In this chapter
Copying photos to your
handheld
Viewing photos
Rotating a photo
Viewing and editing photo
details
Organizing photos
Copying a photo
Deleting a photo
Working with Photos on your
computer
Related topics
Zire™ 31 Handheld
A picture may be worth a thousand
words, but what happens when you
have a thousand pictures that you are
trying to keep organized? Or maybe
just a few that are so meaningful that
you want to have instant access to
them at any time?
Solve both problems with palmOne™
Photos, which features easy viewing
and organization of photos. You can
keep your favorite photos right on your
handheld; select a photo as the
background for your Home screen and
another one as the background for
Agenda View in Calendar; even add a
photo to a Contacts entry.
Benefits of palmOne Photos
• Never be far from your favorite
people or places
• Simplify photo organization
223
CHAPTER 15
Viewing Photos
Copying photos to your handheld
[ ! ] Before You Begin
Install palmOne Photos
from the installation CD
onto your handheld.
Tip
On a Windows computer,
you can also copy photos
by opening the palmOne
Photos desktop
application, selecting Add
Photos to add photos to
an album on your
computer, and then
synchronizing to transfer
the photos to the same
album on your handheld.
Tip
A confirmation dialog
box shows whether the
photos will be copied to
your handheld or to an
expansion card. You can
choose which handheld
will receive the photos by
selecting the username in
the User drop-down box
in the upper-right corner.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
You can transfer photos from your computer to your handheld or to an expansion card. On a
Windows computer, you can also use the palmOne Photos application to create and edit entire
albums and send them to your handheld, where you can view your photos.
If you took the picture with a digital camera, or you found it on the web, it’s likely your handheld
can display it. You can view photos in popular formats such as JPG, BMP, and GIF on your
handheld or from an expansion card inserted in the expansion slot.
WINDOWS ONLY
0
1
From My Computer or Windows Explorer, select the photos you want to copy.
2
Copy the photos:
a. Drag and drop the file(s) or
folder onto the palmOne™
Quick Install icon on the
Windows desktop.
b. When the confirmation dialog
box appears, confirm your
username, the file name, and
the destination, and then click
OK.
224
CHAPTER 15
Viewing Photos
3
Synchronize your handheld with your computer.
Done
MAC ONLY
Tip
In Mac OS X, you can
make the Send to
Handheld droplet a
permanent part of your
desktop by dragging the
droplet to the Dock. Then
simply drag photos, and
other files you want to
transfer to your
handheld, onto the
droplet on the Dock.
0
1
Select the photos you want to
transfer:
a. Drag and drop the photos
onto the Send To Handheld
droplet in the Palm folder.
b. In the Send To Handheld
dialog box, select your
username and click OK.
2
Synchronize your computer with your handheld.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
225
CHAPTER 15
Viewing Photos
Viewing photos
Did You Know?
If you or your friends
have a digital camera that
uses SD memory cards,
you can insert the cards
into the expansion slot
and view the photos on
your handheld.
You can view photos in the following ways:
Thumbnail
View miniature preview versions of your photos.
List View names and dates of photos on your handheld or an expansion card.
Slide show
View all photos in an album, automatically one after another.
You can easily select a photo from Thumbnail or List view to see a full-screen view of the photo,
and rotate the orientation of the photo. You can also view or edit detailed information about a
photo.
Viewing a photo in Thumbnail view
0
1
Go to the Home
2
View a photo in Thumbnail view:
screen and select Photos
.
Album pick
list
a. Tap the pick list in the upperright corner and select the
album containing the photo
you want to view.
Select a
photo to
view
b. If Thumbnail view is not
displayed, tap the Thumbnail
icon in the lower-left corner of
the screen.
Thumbnail icon
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
226
CHAPTER 15
Viewing Photos
3
To see a full-screen view of the photo, select the photo from the thumbnails.
4
Tap anywhere in the photo to return to the Thumbnail view screen.
Done
Viewing a photo in List view
Tip
Can’t remember what
album your photo is in?
Select All Photos from the
pick list.
0
1
Go to the Home
2
View a photo in List view:
screen and select Photos
.
Album pick
list
a. Tap the pick list in the upperright corner and select the
album containing the photo
you want to view.
Select a photo to
view
b. If List view is not displayed,
tap the List icon in the lowerleft corner of the screen.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
List icon
227
CHAPTER 15
Viewing Photos
3
To see a full-screen view of the photo, select the photo from the list.
4
Tap anywhere in the photo to return to the List view screen.
Done
Viewing a slide show
0
Tip
You can set how long a
photo is displayed in slide
show mode before the
next item appears by
opening the menus,
selecting Options,
selecting Preferences,
and then selecting a time
interval from the Slide
Show Delay pick list. The
default is 3 seconds.
0
1
Go to the Home
2
View a slide show:
screen and select Photos
a. Tap the pick list in the upperright corner and select the
album containing the photos
you want to view.
.
Album pick
list
b. Tap Slide Show.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
228
CHAPTER 15
Viewing Photos
3
Tap a photo to stop the slide show and return to Thumbnail or List view.
Done
Rotating a photo
0
Tip
If you receive a message
that the photo is too large
to rotate on your
handheld, synchronize,
and then open and rotate
the photo in
Palm® Desktop software.
Synchronize again to
send the rotated photo
back to your handheld.
0
1
Go to the Home
2
Select the photo you want to rotate:
screen and select Photos
.
a. Tap the pick list in the upper-right corner and select the album containing the
photo you want.
b. Select the photo you want in Thumbnail or List view.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
229
CHAPTER 15
Viewing Photos
3
Rotate the photo:
a. Open the menus
.
b. Select Photos, and then select
Rotate Photo.
c. Select the rotation you want.
4
Tap anywhere in the photo to return to Thumbnail or List view.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
230
CHAPTER 15
Viewing Photos
Viewing and editing photo details
0
0
1
Go to the Home
2
Select the photo you want to view:
screen and select Photos
.
a. Tap the pick list in the upper-right corner and select the album containing the
photos you want.
b. Select the photo you want.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
231
CHAPTER 15
Tip
Photos with notes appear
with a note icon to the
right in List view.
Tip
Tap the scroll arrows at
the bottom of the Photo
Details screen to view
other photos in the
album.
Viewing Photos
3
View photo details:
a. Open the menus
.
b. Select Details from the Photo
menu.
c. In addition to viewing photo
details, you can do the following:
Scroll arrows
Change name Select the photo or video name and enter a new name.
Move to different album Tap the Album pick list and select a new album
location for the photo or video.
Add notes
Tap the Notes field and enter a note for the photo or video.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
232
CHAPTER 15
Viewing Photos
Organizing photos
You can organize your photos in the following ways:
• Create albums and place your photos in those albums.
• Move photos within or between albums.
• Sort photos in List view.
Organizing photos in albums
0
Tip
If a photo is saved on
your handheld, you can
save it only to an album
on your handheld.
Likewise, if a photo is
saved to an expansion
card, you can save it only
to an album on the card.
Tip
To rename or delete an
album, tap the pick list,
select Edit Albums, and
then select the album you
want. Then tap Rename
or Delete.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
1
Go to the Home
2
Create an album:
screen and select Photos
.
a. Tap the pick list in the upperright corner and select Edit
Albums.
b. Select New, enter the name of
the new album, and select OK.
c. Select OK on the Edit Albums
screen.
Continued
233
CHAPTER 15
Tip
If you are not already in
the album you want to
organize, tap the pick list
in the upper-right corner
and select the album you
want.
Viewing Photos
3
Add or remove photos in
albums:
a. On the album screen, select
Organize.
Select to add
Select + to remove
b. Do one of the following:
Tip
Drag the stylus across
multiple photos to add or
remove them all at once.
Did You Know?
If you remove a photo
from an album, it is
moved to the Unfiled
category. The photo is not
deleted from your
handheld.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Add a photo Select a photo that
does not have a plus sign to add
it to the album.
Remove a photo Select a photo
with a plus sign to the left to
remove it from the album.
c. Select Done.
Done
234
CHAPTER 15
Viewing Photos
Moving a photo within and between albums
0
Tip
Move photos within
albums to easily put the
slide show of your kid’s
birthday party in the
sequence you want.
Tip
You can also move a
photo to a new album by
adding it to the new
album. The photo is
automatically deleted
from the old album.
1
Go to the Home
2
Move a photo within an album:
screen and select Photos
.
a. Tap the pick list in the upper-right corner and select the album in which you
want to move a photo.
b. Use the stylus to drag the photo you want to its new position.
3
Move a photo between albums:
a. Tap the pick list in the upperright corner and select the
album containing the photo
you want to move.
b. Open the menus
Tap to move
photo
.
c. Select Details from the Photos
menu, and then select the photo
you want to move.
d. Tap the Album pick list and select the new album for the photo.
e. Select Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
235
CHAPTER 15
Viewing Photos
Sorting photos in List view
Did You Know?
The Date column lists
photos by the date they
were added to your
handheld, not the date
they were taken.
Tip
If you spent time
organizing a slide show
to give the exact
sequence of your
vacation, be careful not to
ruin that order by sorting
the photos by name or
date—changing the order
in List view affects slide
show order.
0
1
Go to the Home
2
Sort photos:
screen and select Photos
a. Tap the pick list in the
upper-right corner and select
the album containing the
photos you want to sort.
Tap to sort
by name
.
Tap to
sort by
date
b. If List view is not displayed,
tap the List icon in the
lower-left corner of the screen.
c. Do one of the following:
Sort by name To list photos by name in ascending (A-Z) order, tap Name. To
list photos by name in descending (Z-A) order, tap Name again.
Sort by date To sort photos from earliest to most recent date, tap Date. To sort
photos from most recent to earliest date, tap Date again.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
236
CHAPTER 15
Viewing Photos
Copying a photo
You can copy photos from your handheld to an expansion card, and vice versa.
0
1
Go to the Home
2
Select a photo to copy:
screen and select Photos
.
a. Tap the pick list in the upper-right corner and select the album containing the
photo you want.
b. Select the photo.
3
Copy the photo:
a. Open the menus
.
b. Select Copy to Card (for photos on your handheld) or Copy to Handheld (for
photos on an expansion card) from the Photo menu.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
237
CHAPTER 15
Viewing Photos
Deleting a photo
0
Tip
In Thumbnail or List view,
delete a photo by
selecting Delete from the
Photo menu, selecting
the photo to delete, and
then selecting Delete.
1
Go to the Home
2
Select a photo to delete:
screen and select Photos
.
a. Tap the pick list in the upper-right corner and select the album containing the
photo you want.
You can also delete a
photo from the Photos
Details screen by
selecting Delete on that
screen.
b. Select the photo.
3
Delete the photo:
a. Open the menus
.
b. Select Delete Photos from the Photo menu, and then select Delete again.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
238
CHAPTER 15
Viewing Photos
Working with Photos on your computer
Use Photos on your computer to view and manage the photos you download to and view on your
handheld. Check out the online Help in Palm® Desktop software to learn how to use Photos on
your computer. The online Help includes info about the following topics:
• Learning about the parts of the Photos window
• Copying photos from your computer to your handheld
• Using Photo Editor to view, crop, rotate, or enhance a photo
• Editing photo details and titles
• Adding notes to a photo
• Printing photos
• Changing between the Thumbnail, List, and Slide Show views
• Sorting photos
• Organizing your photos into albums
WINDOWS ONLY
To open Photos on your computer, double-click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop,
and then click Photos on the launch bar.
MAC ONLY
To open Photos on your computer, launch Palm Desktop software from the Palm folder, and then
select Photos.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
239
CHAPTER 15
Viewing Photos
Related topics
My Handheld
Make your handheld
uniquely yours. For great
tips, software, accessories,
and more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
myzire31.
Support
If you’re having problems
with Photos or with anything
else on your handheld, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support/zire31.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Moving
Around
• Opening applications
• Using menus
Sharing
Beaming photos to other Palm OS® handheld users
Common
Questions
Answers to frequently asked questions about Photos
240
CHAPTER 16
Sharing Information
In this chapter
Beaming
Other ways of sharing
information
Related topics
You have to get this memo to your
boss—now. Or the photo of the
grandkids in their Halloween costumes
to your mom. After you’ve used your
handheld to create or capture that
important business and personal
information, it’s time to share it with
others.
Your handheld comes equipped with a
variety of options for sharing
information, so that you can choose
the quickest, most convenient way of
sending your info.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Benefits of sharing
• Keep others up-to-date with
meaningful business and personal
information
• Choose the most convenient sharing
method from a variety of options
• Create an informal backup copy of
important info
241
CHAPTER 16
Sharing Information
Beaming
Tip
For best results when
beaming, the handhelds
should be between 4 and
39 inches (10 centimeters
and one meter) apart, and
there should be a clear
path between them.
Using the IR port on your handheld, you can beam information from within an application, such as
a photo, a contact, an appointment, or a task, to other Palm OS® handheld users. You can also
beam a category of information, such as a photo album—or even an entire application.
NOTE The receiving handheld must be turned on. Depending on the receiving handheld
model, not all information may be sent correctly.
Beaming information from within an application
0
1
Select the information you want to beam:
a. Open an application.
b. Select the entry you want.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
242
CHAPTER 16
Tip
The leftmost menu is
most applications is
named Record.
Tip
In Contacts, you can
create a contact with your
own information and
select it as your business
card by opening the
Record Menu and
selecting Business Card.
Beam your business card
to other handhelds by
holding down the
Contacts application
button until the Beam
dialog box appears.
Sharing Information
2
Beam the information:
a. Open the menus
.
b. Select the Beam menu item on the leftmost menu.
c. When the Beam dialog box appears, point your handheld’s IR port directly at
the IR port of the other handheld.
IR port
3
Wait for the Beam dialog box to indicate that beaming is complete.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
243
CHAPTER 16
Sharing Information
Beaming a category
Tip
Create a category of
Calendar events such as
your kid’s soccer
schedule, and then beam
the entire category to
your spouse’s handheld.
Tip
When you beam a
category, the individual
entries within the
category (contacts,
memos, photos, and so
on) appear as unfiled
items on the receiving
device.
0
1
Select the category you want to beam:
a. Open an application.
b. From the list view, tap the pick list in the upper-right corner and select the
category you want. This takes you to the list view within the selected
category.
2
Beam the category:
a. Open the menus
.
b. Select the Beam Category menu item on the leftmost menu.
c. When the Beam dialog box appears, point your handheld’s IR port directly at
the IR port of the other handheld.
IR port
3
Wait for the Beam dialog box to indicate that beaming is complete.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
244
CHAPTER 16
Sharing Information
Beaming an application
Tip
Tap the Beam From pick
list to beam an
application from an
expansion card inserted
into the expansion slot.
0
1
Select the application you want
to beam:
a. Go to the Home
screen.
b. Open the menus
.
c. Select Beam on the App
menu.
d. Select the application you
want to beam.
NOTE You cannot beam an
application that has a lock icon
next to the application size.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
245
CHAPTER 16
Sharing Information
2
Beam the application:
a. Tap Beam.
b. When the Beam dialog box appears, point your handheld’s IR port directly at
the IR port of the other handheld.
IR port
3
Wait for the Beam dialog box to indicate that beaming is complete.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
246
CHAPTER 16
Sharing Information
Other ways of sharing information
Here are some other ways of sharing information:
• Copy information or an application onto an expansion card inserted into the expansion slot, and
view the information by inserting the card into the slot on another Palm OS® handheld.
• Copy information such as a photo from your handheld to your computer, or from computer to
handheld, by synchronizing.
• After synchronizing, use Palm® Desktop software to send information such as a contact or a task
as an attachment to an e-mail message from your computer’s e-mail application. For contacts
and calendar events, use the Forward command in the File menu to attach the item directly to an
e-mail message. For contacts, events, memos, and tasks use either the Export or Send To
command in the Edit menu to save the item as a separate file in a folder you choose. You can
then attach that file to an e-mail message.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
247
CHAPTER 16
Sharing Information
Related topics
My Handheld
Make your handheld
uniquely yours. For great
tips, software, accessories,
and more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
myzire31.
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Synchronizing
Sharing information by synchronizing your handheld with your computer
Expansion
Sharing information by saving it to an expansion card that can be viewed
from another handheld
Common
Questions
Answers to frequently asked questions about sharing information
Support
If you’re having problems
with sharing information or
with anything else on your
handheld, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support/zire31.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
248
CHAPTER 17
Keeping Your Information Private
In this chapter
Choosing a security level
Marking information as
private
Setting the level of privacy
Using a password
You probably wouldn’t leave your door
unlocked at night, so why should it be
any different with your handheld?
When you think about the amount of
personal and private information
stored there, you’ll definitely want to
protect it.
Locking your handheld
Related topics
Benefits of privacy
• Protect information if your handheld
is misplaced
• Hide private information
• Unlock your handheld using only one
hand
Zire™ 31 Handheld
249
CHAPTER 17
Keeping Your Information Private
Choosing a security level
There are a variety of security levels available for your handheld. Choose the level that provides
the best mix of security and convenience.
Activating no security features All entries are accessible to anyone who has your handheld. This
includes entries that are marked private, but are not masked or hidden.
Masking private entries without creating a password
selected.
Masked entries are displayed when
Hiding private entries and creating a password Private entries are displayed when the password
is entered. This is the highest level of security.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
250
CHAPTER 17
Keeping Your Information Private
Marking information as private
Marking an entry as private is the first step in protecting your info.
0
1
Open an application.
2
Create a new entry, or select the entry that you want to make private.
3
Mark it as private:
a. For existing Contacts, tap Edit.
b. Tap Details.
c. Tap the Private check box.
d. Select OK.
e. In Contacts and Memos, select
Done.
Private check box
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
251
CHAPTER 17
Keeping Your Information Private
Setting the level of privacy
Add further protection to your private entries by setting the privacy level (hidden/masked).
Hiding or masking private entries
0
1
Open Security:
a. Go to the Home
b. Select Prefs
screen.
.
c. Select Security.
2
Select the display option for private entries:
a. Tap the Current Privacy pick list.
b. Select one of these options, and then select Done.
Show Private Records
Display private entries.
Mask Private Records Block entries with a gray bar; you can see the bar
onscreen, but you can’t see the entries’ content.
Hide Private Records
Make private entries invisible.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
252
CHAPTER 17
Keeping Your Information Private
Cont’d.
Masked entry
Done
Viewing an entry that is masked
To open a masked entry, select the entry. If you have a password, enter it in the Show Private
Records dialog box, and then select OK. When you close a masked entry, it remains masked.
Using a password
Tip
Use a password to
protect confidential work
or personal information.
If your handheld is lost or
stolen, this information
will be safe.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Further protect your hidden or masked entries by creating a password, which is needed to display
the contents of hidden/masked entries.
253
CHAPTER 17
Keeping Your Information Private
Creating a password
Tip
The best passwords
consist of a mix of letters,
characters, and numbers.
Longer passwords are
better than short ones.
Any password you create
is case-sensitive.
0
1
Open Security:
a. Go to the Home
b. Select Prefs
screen.
.
Password box
c. Select Security.
Tip
Enter your password with
Graffiti® 2 writing or the
onscreen keyboard.
2
Create a password and hint:
a. Tap the Password box.
b. Enter a password.
c. Enter a hint to help you
remember the password if
you forget it.
d. Select OK.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
254
CHAPTER 17
Keeping Your Information Private
3
Confirm the password:
a. Enter the password again.
b. Select OK.
4
Select Done.
Done
Changing a password
You can change your password at any time. You must enter the current password before you can
change it.
Tip
In Palm® Desktop
software, you can require
password entry for
private info to display.
Open the Tools menu and
select Options, and then
select Security.
0
1
Open Security:
a. Go to the Home
b. Select Prefs
screen.
.
Password box
c. Select Security.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
255
CHAPTER 17
Keeping Your Information Private
2
Change your password:
a. Enter a new password and hint.
b. Select OK.
3
Confirm the password:
a. Enter the password again.
b. Select OK.
4
Select Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
256
CHAPTER 17
Keeping Your Information Private
Deleting a password
You can delete your password at any time. You must enter the current password before you can
delete it.
0
1
Open Security:
a. Go to the Home
b. Select Prefs
screen.
.
Password box
c. Select Security.
2
Delete your password:
a. Tap Unassign.
b. Select Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
257
CHAPTER 17
Keeping Your Information Private
Deleting a forgotten password
If you forget your password, your handheld displays the password hint (if you entered one) to help
you remember the password. If you still can’t remember the password, you can delete it from your
handheld. Deleting a forgotten password also deletes all entries marked as private.
[ ! ] IMPORTANT Be sure to synchronize your handheld before and after this procedure, so you
can restore any private entries that were deleted along with the password.
0
1
Open Security:
a. Go to the Home
screen.
Password box
b. Select Prefs
.
c. Select Security.
2
Delete the forgotten password:
a. Tap the Password box.
b. Tap Lost Password.
c. Select Yes.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
258
CHAPTER 17
Keeping Your Information Private
3
Do one of the following, and then select Done:
• Enter a new password and hint, and then select OK.
• If you don’t want to create a new password, tap Unassign or Cancel.
4
Synchronize your handheld with your computer to restore any private entries
that were deleted.
Done
Locking your handheld
[ ! ] Before You Begin
To use the locking feature,
you must first create a
password for your
handheld.
Tip
To start your handheld
when it is locked, turn it
on. Enter your password,
and then select Done.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Protect the entire contents of your handheld, whether marked private or not, by using your
password to lock your handheld. You can set your handheld to lock automatically, or you can lock
it manually.
[ ! ] IMPORTANT If you lock your handheld, you must enter the exact password to unlock it. If you
forget the password, your handheld will show you the hint you entered to help you remember the
password. If you still cannot remember the password, you must do a hard reset to resume using
your handheld. A hard reset deletes all of the information on your handheld, including your
password, but you can restore the information by synchronizing your handheld with your
computer.
259
CHAPTER 17
Keeping Your Information Private
Locking your handheld automatically
0
1
Open Security:
a. Go to the Home
b. Select Prefs
screen.
.
c. Select Security.
2
Auto Lock
Handheld box
Open the Lock Handheld dialog box:
a. Tap the Auto Lock Handheld box.
b. If necessary, enter your password, and then select OK.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
260
CHAPTER 17
Keeping Your Information Private
3
Select one of these lock options:
Never Always leave your
handheld unlocked.
On power off Automatically
lock your handheld whenever
you turn it off.
At a preset time Set a time
when your handheld will
automatically lock.
After a preset delay Set a
period of inactivity after which
your handheld will automatically
lock.
4
Select OK, and then select Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
261
CHAPTER 17
Keeping Your Information Private
Locking your handheld manually
0
1
Open Security:
a. Go to the Home
b. Select Prefs
screen.
.
c. Select Security.
Lock & Turn Off
2
Select Lock & Turn Off.
3
Select Off & Lock.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
262
CHAPTER 17
Keeping Your Information Private
Related topics
Community
To explore the world of your
handheld, go to
www.palmOne.com/
myzire31.
Support
If you’re having problems
with private entries or
anything else on your
handheld, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support/zire31.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Moving around
• Opening applications
• Using menus
Synchronizing
Creating a backup of your information
Customizing
Entering your owner information in case your handheld is lost or stolen
Maintaining
Doing a hard reset
Common
Questions
Answers to frequently asked questions about privacy
263
CHAPTER 18
Using Categories to Organize Information
In this chapter
Adding a category
Renaming a category
Deleting a category
Placing information into a
category
Viewing information by
category
Related topics
If you’re like most people, you use
your handheld to manage your work
life and your personal life. Yet these
two areas contain so many details:
your children’s after-school activities,
your conference schedule, your
shopping list for the week, and
entertainment.
Categories help you organize different
aspects of your life, no matter how you
choose to group them.
Benefits of categories
• Better organize your information
• Easily retrieve the information you
need
Zire™ 31 Handheld
264
CHAPTER 18
Using Categories to Organize Information
Adding a category
Did You Know?
You can have up to
15 categories in an
application.
Tip
Colors make it easy to
find the info you need in
Calendar.
Tip
Add a category in
Contacts that contains all
of your medical numbers
for quick access.
Other useful categories in
Contacts are Emergency,
for fire, ambulance, and
police; Children, for your
children’s school and
friends; and
Entertainment, for
restaurants or theaters
that you visit often.
You can add categories in many applications: Contacts, Expense, Memos, Note Pad, Tasks, and
palmOne™ Photos. (In palmOne Photos, categories are called albums.) Place individual entries
into these categories to easily get to a group of related items.
In addition to putting individual entries into a category, you can also put entire applications into
categories. For instance, you may find it convenient to put Expense and Calculator in a category
called Money.
0
1
• To add a category for individual entries in one of the applications above, open
that application.
• To add a category for applications, go to the Home screen
2
.
Add a new category:
a. Tap the pick list in the upperright corner, and then select
Edit Categories.
b. Tap New and enter the name
of the new category.
c. Select OK, and then select OK
again.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
265
CHAPTER 18
Using Categories to Organize Information
Renaming a category
Tip
If you want to combine
items in different
categories, rename one
category to the other
category name.
Did You Know?
Some categories, like All
and Unfiled, come with
your handheld and
cannot be changed.
0
1
• To rename a category within an application, open that application.
• To rename a category for applications, go to the Home screen
2
.
Rename the category:
a. Tap the pick list in the upper-right corner, and then select Edit Categories.
b. Select the name of the category you want to change, and then tap Rename.
c. Enter a new category name, and then select OK.
d. Select OK again.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
266
CHAPTER 18
Using Categories to Organize Information
Deleting a category
If you delete a category, the items in that category will move to the Unfiled category.
Tip
In Expense, you can
delete a category,
including its contents,
with the Purge command.
0
1
• To delete a category within an application, open that application.
• To delete a category for applications, go to the Home screen
2
.
Delete the category:
a. In Calendar, select an event, and then select Details.
b. Open the list of categories:
Calendar
Tap the Category pick list.
All other applications Tap the pick list in the upper-right corner, and then
select Edit Categories.
c. Select the name of the category you want to delete, and then select Delete.
d. Select OK.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
267
CHAPTER 18
Using Categories to Organize Information
Placing information into a category
Tip
You can also enter new
information into a
category by opening the
application, and then
selecting the category
from the upper-right
corner. Tap New and
enter the information.
You can place individual entries into categories within an application. For example, you may want
to place some of your contacts into a category called Medical.
You may also find it convenient to view applications in groups. You may want all of your games in
one category, or all of your multimedia applications in another. Then you can go right to the group
of applications you need.
NOTE An entry or application cannot be placed in more than one category.
Placing an entry into a category
0
1
Open an application that contains a category option. In Calendar, go to Day
View.
2
Open an entry.
3
In Note Pad only: skip to step 5.
4
Open the Details dialog box:
Contacts
Tap Edit, and then tap Details.
All other applications
Tap Details.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
268
CHAPTER 18
Tip
To place an entry into a
different category, simply
select a different category
from the Category pick
list.
Using Categories to Organize Information
5
Place the entry into a category:
a. Select a category from the Category pick list.
Category
b. If necessary, select OK
c. If necessary, select Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
269
CHAPTER 18
Using Categories to Organize Information
Placing an application into a category
0
1
Go to the Home screen
2
Open the Category dialog box:
a. Open the menus
.
.
b. Select Category on the App menu.
3
Place the application into a
category:
a. Tap the pick list next to the
application you want to place
into a category.
b. Select a category, and then
select Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
270
CHAPTER 18
Using Categories to Organize Information
Viewing information by category
Tip
In the Home screen, scroll
through the categories by
repeatedly tapping the
Home screen icon, or
pressing Right or Left on
the navigator. To view all
of the applications on
your handheld select the
All category.
Tip
Scroll through the
categories in Contacts by
repeatedly pressing the
Contacts button.
0
1
• To view entries by category, open an application that contains categories.
• To view applications by category, go to the Home screen
2
.
Display the category you want to view:
Calendar Select Show Category List, and then select the category you want to
view from the pick list.
All other applications Select the category you want to view from the pick list
in the upper-right corner.
Pick list
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
271
CHAPTER 18
Using Categories to Organize Information
Related topics
Community
To explore the world of your
handheld, go to
www.palmOne.com/
myzire31.
Support
If you’re having problems
with categories or anything
else on your handheld, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support/zire31.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Moving around
• Opening applications
• Using menus
Calendar
Color-coding your events in Calendar
palmOne
Photos
Working with albums
Sharing
Beaming a category to another Palm OS® handheld
272
CHAPTER 19
Installing and Removing Applications
In this chapter
Checking space and version
numbers
Installing the additional
software from the CD
Installing other applications
and files
Removing an application
from your handheld
Removing Palm Desktop
software
from your computer
Related topics
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Did you ever think you could use your
handheld to manage your weight loss
program? How about using it to track
the details of your round of golf?
There are thousands of applications
available for Palm OS® handhelds. Add
the ones you need to help you get the
most out of your handheld, no matter
what you’re doing.
Benefits of installing applications
• Add more applications to your
handheld
• Add photos to your handheld
• Add MP3 files to your expansion card
• Use Addit to easily find new
applications for your handheld
273
CHAPTER 19
Installing and Removing Applications
Checking space and version numbers
Before you install a file or an application, it’s important to make sure you have enough space for it.
You may also want to check the version number of applications that are already on your handheld
or expansion card, in case you’re interested in upgrading them.
0
1
Open the Info dialog box:
a. Go to the Home screen
b. Open the menus
.
.
c. Select Info on the App menu.
2
View space info and version
numbers:
Pick list
a. Tap the Device pick list and
select one of these options:
Handheld Get information
about applications stored on
your handheld.
Expansion card name Get
information about applications
stored on your expansion card.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
274
CHAPTER 19
Installing and Removing Applications
Cont’d.
b. Tap one of the following options, and then select Done:
Version
Displays the version numbers of all of your applications.
Size Shows how much space each application occupies. The bar at the top
shows the total space currently in use on your handheld or expansion card.
Records
Shows the number of records in an application.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
275
CHAPTER 19
Installing and Removing Applications
Installing the additional software from the CD
Your handheld comes with many applications that are already installed and ready to use. The CD
that came with your handheld includes lots of other applications to make your handheld even
more useful and more fun. You can install these applications at any time.
Did You Know?
Addit is a handheldbased catalog of some of
the best software
applications available for
your handheld. Install
Addit from the CD and
use it to easily find an
application such as a new
game or business
application. Download a
trial version of the
application the next time
you synchronize. If you
like it, Addit makes it easy
to buy it with just one tap
of the stylus.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
WINDOWS ONLY
0
1
Insert the CD into your computer.
2
On the Discover Your Handheld screen, click Add software to your handheld.
3
Follow the onscreen instructions to install the applications you want to install.
4
Synchronize your handheld with your computer.
Done
276
CHAPTER 19
Installing and Removing Applications
MAC ONLY
0
1
Insert the CD into your computer.
2
Double-click the Essential Software folder.
3
Install the applications you want to install.
4
Synchronize your handheld with your computer.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
277
CHAPTER 19
Installing and Removing Applications
Installing other applications and files
Did You Know?
Most handheld application
files have the extension
PRC or PDB.
You can also install applications and files on your handheld that did not come on the CD. For any
files that you install, there must be an application on your handheld that can read these files. For
example, you can view photos only if you have an application such as palmOne™ Photos on your
handheld.
Here are the types of files you can install on your handheld:
• Applications designed for Palm OS® handhelds, including PRC and PDB
• Image files, including BMP, JPEG, and GIF for use with palmOne Photos
• MP3 and RealAudio audio files (these files are installed only on the expansion card) for use with
RealOne Mobile Player
Installing applications and files on a Windows computer
If you installed Palm® Desktop software, you automatically have Palm® Quick Install on your
Windows computer. This tool makes it easy to install applications and files when you synchronize.
You can install applications and files by dragging and dropping onto the Palm Quick Install icon, or
by using the commands in the Palm Quick Install window.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
278
CHAPTER 19
Installing and Removing Applications
Using the Palm Quick Install icon
WINDOWS ONLY
Tip
You can also install files
on your handheld by
right-clicking them on
your computer. Select
Send To Palm Quick
Install, and the files are
placed on your handheld
the next time you
synchronize.
Tip
If there are still files in the
list after you synchronize,
they were not installed.
Open the application
associated with this file,
and then synchronize
again.
0
1
2
Copy or download the application(s) or file(s) you want to install onto your
computer.
Drag and drop the files onto the Palm Quick Install icon:
a. From My Computer or Windows Explorer, select the file(s) or folder that you
want to install.
b. Drag and drop the file(s) or folder onto the
Palm Quick Install icon on the desktop.
c. Select your username and click OK.
3
Synchronize your handheld with your computer.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
279
CHAPTER 19
Installing and Removing Applications
Using the Palm Quick Install window
WINDOWS ONLY
Tip
To install a folder on your
handheld, open the File
menu in Palm Quick
Install and select Add
Folder.
Tip
To move applications
between your handheld
and the expansion card,
drag the files up or down.
0
1
Copy or download the file(s) you want to install onto your computer.
2
Double-click the Palm Quick Install icon on the desktop.
3
Select the files to install:
User drop-down list
a. In the User drop-down list,
select the name for your
handheld.
Tip
If you don’t see the file
you want to install, go to
the folder you copied the
file to.
b. Click Add.
c. Select the file(s) you want to
install.
d. Click Open.
4
Synchronize your handheld with your computer.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
280
CHAPTER 19
Installing and Removing Applications
Installing applications and files on a Mac computer
Tip
In Mac OS X, you can make
the Send To Handheld
droplet a permanent part
of your desktop by
dragging the droplet to the
Dock. Then simply drag
songs, and other files you
want to transfer to your
handheld, onto the droplet
in the Dock.
You can install applications and files on a Mac computer by dragging and dropping onto the Send
To Handheld icon, or by using the commands in the HotSync® menu.
Using the Send To Handheld droplet
MAC ONLY
0
1
2
Copy or download the application(s) or file(s) you want to install onto your
computer.
Drag and drop the files onto the Send To Handheld droplet:
a. Drag and drop the file(s) or folder onto the
Send To Handheld droplet in the Palm folder.
b. In the Send to Handheld dialog box, select
your username and click OK.
3
Synchronize your handheld with your computer.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
281
CHAPTER 19
Installing and Removing Applications
Using commands in the HotSync menu
MAC ONLY
Tip
To move applications
between your handheld
and the expansion card,
click Change Destination.
Use the arrows to move
the files, and then click
OK.
Tip
If you do not see the
application or file in the
folder, go to the folder
that contains the
application you want to
install.
0
1
2
Copy or download the application you want to install onto your computer.
Select the files to install on your
handheld:
a. In the Palm folder, doubleclick the HotSync Manager.
b. Select the HotSync menu, and
then select Install Handheld
files.
c. In the User pop-up menu,
select the name that
corresponds to your
handheld.
d. Click Add to List.
e. Select the file(s) you want to
install.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
282
CHAPTER 19
Installing and Removing Applications
3
Install the files on your handheld:
a. Click Add File.
b. Close the Install Handheld Files window.
c. Synchronize your handheld with your computer.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
283
CHAPTER 19
Installing and Removing Applications
Removing an application from your handheld
If you run out of memory or decide that you no longer want some applications you installed, you
can remove them from your handheld or from an expansion card.
NOTE You can only remove add-on applications, patches, and extensions that you install. You
cannot remove the applications that are part of the operating system of your handheld.
0
1
Go to the Home screen
2
Open the Delete dialog box:
a. Open the menus
.
.
b. Select Delete from the App menu.
3
Delete the application:
a. Tap the Delete From pick list, and then select Handheld or expansion card.
b. Select the application that you want to remove, and then tap Delete.
c. Select Yes, and then select Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
284
CHAPTER 19
Installing and Removing Applications
Removing Palm Desktop software from your computer
If you no longer want to use Palm Desktop software, you can remove it from your computer. This
process removes only the application files. The data in your Users folder remains untouched.
[ ! ] IMPORTANT If you remove Palm Desktop software, you also remove the synchronization
software and can no longer synchronize your information. Even if you want to synchronize with
another personal information manager, like Microsoft Outlook, you must leave Palm Desktop
software installed on your computer.
WINDOWS ONLY
NOTE You may have to modify these steps to correspond with the operating system on your
computer.
0
1
Open Add/Remove Programs:
a. From the Start menu, select Settings, and then select Control Panel.
b. Double-click the Add/Remove programs icon.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
285
CHAPTER 19
Installing and Removing Applications
2
Remove Palm Desktop software:
Change or Remove Programs
a. Click Change or Remove
Programs
b. Select Palm Desktop software,
and then click Remove.
c. Click Yes in the Confirm File
Deletion box.
d. Click OK, and then click Close.
Done
MAC ONLY
0
1
2
3
Insert the CD that came with your handheld into your computer.
Double-click the CD icon on your desktop, and then double-click the Palm
Desktop Installer icon.
From the Easy Install screen, select Uninstall from the pop-up menu.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
286
CHAPTER 19
Installing and Removing Applications
4
Select the software you want to remove, and then click Uninstall.
5
Select the folder that contains your Palm Desktop software files.
6
Click Remove, and then restart your computer.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
287
CHAPTER 19
Installing and Removing Applications
Related topics
Community
To explore the world of your
handheld, go to
www.palmOne.com/
myzire31.
Support
If you’re having problems
installing applications, or
with anything else on your
handheld, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support/zire31.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Setting up
Switching between Palm Desktop software and Microsoft Outlook
Moving around
• Opening applications
• Using menus
RealOne Player
• Transferring files from a CD to an expansion card
• Listening to audio files on your handheld
288
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
In this chapter
Customizing the Home screen
Making the screen easier to read
Giving your favorite applications
a button or icon
Although customizing your handheld
is optional, it’s like changing the preset
radio stations in your car. Since you’re
probably not driving around with the
dealer’s preset radio stations, why not
personalize your handheld, too?
Setting the date and time
Customizing the way you enter
information
Selecting sound settings
Entering your owner
information
Conserving battery power
Connecting your handheld to
other devices
You can easily customize the sound
levels, fonts, and screen colors on your
handheld by using preferences and
menus. And preference settings can
help extend the life of your handheld’s
battery.
Benefits of customizing
•
•
•
•
Access applications quickly
Conserve power
Enjoy your handheld more
Make your screen easy to read
Customizing network settings
Related topics
Zire™ 31 Handheld
289
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
Customizing the Home screen
[ ! ] Before You Begin
Install palmOne™ Photos
from the installation CD
onto your handheld.
Did You Know?
You can also customize
the Home screen by
organizing your
applications into
categories.
Use your favorite photo as the background for the Home screen. Or display your application icons
in list format with small icons so that you can see more applications without scrolling.
0
1
2
Go to the Home
Open the Display Options dialog
box:
a. Open the menus
Tip
If the text is difficult to see
against your new
background, select a
different Color Theme to
change the text color.
screen.
.
b. Select Options, and then
select Display Options.
3
4
Tap the View By pick list and select List or Icon as the display format.
If you want the last category you viewed to reappear the next time you visit the
Home screen, select the Remember Last Category check box.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
290
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
5
Select a photo for the background:
a. Select the Background check box.
b. Tap the photo thumbnail and select a photo.
c. Adjust the fade setting so that the text is easy to read against the photo.
d. Select OK.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
291
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
Making the screen easier to read
In many applications, you can change the font style to make text easier to read. There are four font
styles available.
In certain lighting conditions you may also need to adjust the brightness and contrast to read the
information on the screen.
Changing the screen fonts
Small font
Large font
Small bold
font
Large bold
font
Zire™ 31 Handheld
292
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
0
1
Open an application.
2
Open the Select Font dialog box:
a. Open the menus
.
b. Select Options, and then select Font.
3
Tap the font style you want to use, and then select OK.
Small
Small bold
Large bold
Large
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
293
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
Adjusting the brightness and contrast
Did You Know?
You can assign the fullscreen pen stroke to open
the Adjust Display dialog
box. See Giving your
favorite applications a
button or icon for details.
Tip
When the Adjust Display
dialog box is open, you
can also press Up and
Down on the navigator to
adjust the contrast.
Did You Know?
Selecting Low as the
Brightness setting can
conserve battery power.
0
1
Tap the Display icon to open the Adjust Display dialog box.
Display icon
2
Adjust the settings:
a. Tap Low or High to adjust the brightness level.
b. Drag the slider to adjust the contrast level.
c. Select Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
294
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
Changing screen colors
Choose a new set of text and background colors for all your applications.
0
1
Open Color Theme Preferences:
a. Go to the Home
b. Select Prefs
screen.
.
c. Select Color Theme.
2
Select a theme, and then select Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
295
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
Giving your favorite applications a button or icon
Tired of going to the Home screen to open an application you use a lot? Use the Buttons
Preferences screen to reassign the applications associated with the buttons on the front of your
handheld and the HotSync® icon.
For example, if you use Memos often, you can assign Memos to a button or the HotSync icon so
that you don’t have to scroll through the Home screen whenever you want to use that application.
Tip
To restore all the buttons
to the original palmOne
settings, tap Default.
0
1
Open Buttons Preferences:
a. Go to the Home
b. Select Prefs
c. Select Buttons.
2
screen.
.
Pick list
Tap the pick list next to the button (or icon) you want to reassign and select the
application that you want to assign to that button.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
296
CHAPTER 20
»
Key Term
Full-screen pen stroke A
stroke that is drawn from
the bottom of the input
area to the top of the
screen. You can use this
stroke as a quick way to
do a selected task, such
as opening the Graffiti® 2
help screen.
Customizing Your Handheld
3
Assign the full-screen pen stroke:
a. Tap More.
b. Tap the pick list and select the
action you want to assign to
the full-screen pen stroke.
Pick list
c. Select OK.
4
Tap Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
297
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
Setting the date and time
You can set the date, time, and location for all the applications on your handheld that require this
information. You can also select the format in which the date, time, and numbers appear.
Selecting a location
You can set the current date and time based on your location. When you travel to a new time zone,
change the Location setting to quickly reset the date and time. Your appointments stay at the time
you entered them—no adjustments for time zones. So always enter your schedule based on the
time zone you will be in on the day of the event.
Did You Know?
The location you select
also appears as the
primary location in World
Clock.
0.
1
Open Date & Time Preferences:
a. Go to the Home
b. Select Prefs
screen.
.
c. Select Date & Time.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
298
CHAPTER 20
Tip
You can rename the
location to the city where
you live. Tap the Name
field, and then modify the
location name.
Customizing Your Handheld
2
Select the location:
Name field
a. Tap the Location pick list, and
select a city in your time zone.
If you found a city in the list,
go to step 3.
No nearby city? Select Edit
List, do steps b–e.
b. Tap Add.
c. Select a city in your time zone,
and then select OK.
d. Select OK again, and then
select Done.
e. Tap the Location pick list, and
select the city you just added.
3
Select Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
299
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
Resetting the date and time
In most cases you won’t need to reset the date and time. However, you may need to do this if you
do a hard reset on your handheld.
0
1
Open Date & Time Preferences:
a. Go to the Home
b. Select Prefs
screen.
.
c. Select Date & Time.
2
Select the location.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
300
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
3
Set the date:
a. Tap the Set Date box.
Year
arrows
b. Tap the arrows to select the
current year.
c. Tap the current month.
d. Tap the current date.
4
Set the time:
a. Tap the Set Time box.
b. Tap the hour and minute
boxes, and then tap the
arrows to change them.
c. Tap AM or PM, and then
select OK.
NOTE If you’re using a
24-hour clock format, you won’t
see the AM PM options.
5
Select Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
301
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
Selecting formats for dates, times, and numbers
Would you rather see the time displayed in a 24-hour format, or dates that begin with the month or
year? Use the Formats Preferences screen to change these settings and to apply them to all the
applications on your handheld.
You can quickly choose the preset formats based on geographic regions where you might use
your handheld. For example, in the United Kingdom, time often is expressed using a 24-hour
clock. In the United States, time is expressed using a 12-hour clock with an AM or PM suffix. You
can use the original preset formats or change them based on your personal preferences.
0
1
Open Formats Preferences:
a. Go to the Home
b. Select Prefs
screen.
.
c. Select Formats.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
302
CHAPTER 20
Tip
The country setting
changes only the way the
date and time look. It
doesn’t change your
handheld’s time to that
country’s time. To do that,
go to Date&Time
Preferences or to World
Clock.
Customizing Your Handheld
2
Select a country:
a. Tap the Preset to box to open
the Set Country dialog box.
b. Select a country.
c. Select OK.
3
[ & ] OPTIONAL
Customize any of the following preset formats:
Time Controls whether the time displays in 12-hour or 24-hour format and
which symbol separates the numbers.
Date Controls the sequence in which the day, month, and year appear and
which symbol separates the segments.
Week starts Controls whether applications treat Sunday or Monday as the first
day of the week.
Numbers
4
Controls the decimal and thousands separator symbols.
Select Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
303
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
Customizing the way you enter information
Your handheld lets you choose how you enter information. You can choose the writing area,
choose Graffiti 2 strokes, and create shortcuts to make entering information faster.
Choosing the input area
You can write Graffiti 2 characters in the input area, or you can turn on Writing Area Preferences
and use the full screen for Graffiti 2 writing; you do not have to write in the input area.
0
1
Open Writing Area Preferences:
a. Go to the Home
b. Select Prefs
screen.
.
c. Select Writing Area.
2
Tap one of the following, and then select Done:
On Turns on the full-screen writing area. When you select this option, a check
box appears for you to choose if you want to see your strokes as you write.
Off Turns off the full-screen writing area. When you select this option you
must use the input area for Graffiti 2 writing.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
304
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
Using the full-screen writing area
[ ! ] Before You Begin
Turn on Writing Area
Preferences as described
in the previous section.
Tip
Right after you write a
character, your handheld
interprets a quick tap on
the screen as a period
character. If you want to
tap a button, either wait a
few seconds or
temporarily turn off fullscreen writing by tapping
the shaded box in the
lower-right corner. The
shaded box changes to a
box outline when Writing
Area Preferences are off.
0
1
Open the entry where you want
to enter information:
a. Open an application.
b. Select a record or tap New.
Shaded box
indicates Writing
Area is on
2
Position the cursor where you want the characters to appear and do any of the
following:
• Write lowercase Graffiti 2 letters anywhere on the left side of the screen.
• Write numbers anywhere on the right side of the screen.
• Write uppercase letters in the middle of the screen.
• Write the Punctuation Shift stroke
characters.
before writing symbols and other special
• Use buttons and other controls that appear on the screen by tapping and
holding the button or control until it activates.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
305
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
Customizing Graffiti 2 strokes
There is more than one way to write certain Graffiti 2 characters. Use the Graffiti 2 Preferences
screen to select an alternate stroke shape for these characters.
0
1
Open Graffiti 2 Preferences:
a. Go to the Home
b. Select Prefs
screen.
.
c. Select Graffiti 2.
2
Select alternate strokes:
a. Tap a character to view its
alternate stroke.
b. Select the check box to use
the alternate stroke, and then
select Done.
3
Repeat step 2 for each stroke you want to reassign, and then select Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
306
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
Setting up ShortCuts
Tip
You may want to add a
space character after the
last word in your
ShortCut text. This way, a
space automatically
follows the ShortCut text.
Are you looking for a quicker way to enter information on your handheld? Use ShortCuts to define
abbreviations for any words, letters, or numbers that you enter often. You can use your ShortCuts
anywhere you enter info with Graffiti 2 writing.
0
1
Open ShortCuts Preferences:
a. Go to the Home
Tip
To learn how to use
ShortCuts while entering
information, see Writing
Graffiti 2 ShortCuts.
b. Select Prefs
screen.
.
c. Select ShortCuts.
Continued
Did You Know?
Your ShortCuts are
backed up on your
computer when you
synchronize.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
307
CHAPTER 20
Tip
The ShortCut Text can be
45 characters long. That’s
long enough for a name
whose spelling you
always forget or a
complex e-mail address.
Customizing Your Handheld
2
Create a ShortCut:
a. Tap New.
b. On the ShortCut Name line,
enter the abbreviation.
c. On the ShortCut Text line(s),
enter the text you want to insert
when you write the
abbreviation.
d. Select OK, and then select Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
308
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
Changing ShortCuts
Tip
To delete a ShortCut,
open ShortCuts
Preferences and select
the ShortCut. Tap Delete,
tap Yes, and then tap
Done.
After you create a ShortCut, you can modify it at any time.
0
1
Open ShortCuts Preferences:
a. Go to the Home
b. Select Prefs
screen.
.
c. Select Shortcuts.
2
Edit the ShortCut:
a. Select the ShortCut you want to change.
b. Tap Edit.
c. Make your changes.
d. Select OK, and then select Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
309
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
Correcting problems with tapping
»
Key Term
Digitizer Another name
for your handheld’s
screen and the internal
circuitry that enables it to
respond appropriately to
taps.
Is your screen not responding to taps? Are you getting unexpected results when you tap? For
example, when you tap the number keyboard icon, does the Find dialog box open instead? If this
happens, it’s time to align the screen.
0
1
a. Go to the Home
Tip
If your screen is not
responding to taps, use
the navigator to open
Digitizer Preferences.
»
Key Term
Calibration The process
of aligning your
handheld’s touchsensitive screen so that
when you tap an element
on the screen, your
handheld detects exactly
what you want it to do.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Open Digitizer Preferences:
b. Select Prefs
screen.
.
c. Select Digitizer.
2
Tap the targets on the screen as precisely as possible, and then select Done.
NOTE You need to tap at least three targets—maybe more if you don’t tap
carefully.
Done
310
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
Selecting sound settings
Tip
You can choose different
types of sounds for
Calendar, Tasks, and
World Clock. Go to the
application, open the
Options menu, and then
select Preferences.
Are sounds too soft or too loud? Set the volume levels for the system, game, and alarm tones, or
turn sounds off altogether with the Silent profile.
0
1
Open Sounds & Alerts
Preferences:
a. Go to the Home
b. Select Prefs
Did You Know?
When you connect a
headset to your
handheld, the external
speaker is automatically
silenced, the Sounds &
Alerts settings are
maintained, and all
volume levels are
automatically adjusted
for use with a headset.
Profile boxes
screen.
.
c. Select Sounds & Alerts.
2
Select Custom or Silent.
3
If you selected Silent in step 2, select Done.
If you selected Custom in step 2, tap the System Sound, Game Sound, and
Alarm Sound pick lists and select the volume level for each sound; then select
Done.
Done
0
Zire™ 31 Handheld
311
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
Entering your owner information
Did You Know?
If you use Security
Preferences to turn off
and lock your handheld
with a password, your
owner info appears the
next time you turn on
your handheld. See
Keeping Your Information
Private for more info.
It’s a good idea to enter information that could help someone contact you if you ever lose your
handheld (if there’s enough battery power to turn it on). By default, the Owner Preferences screen
contains the information you entered when you installed the CD and set up your handheld, but
you can update or add to this information.
0
1
Open Owner Preferences:
a. Go to the Home
b. Select Prefs
Tip
If you assigned a
password in Security
Preferences, you must
tap Unlock and enter your
password to change your
owner info.
screen.
.
c. Select Owner.
2
Modify or enter the text, and then select Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
312
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
Conserving battery power
You can save battery power by preventing your handheld from turning on accidentally and by
adjusting the Power Preferences settings.
Preventing your handheld from turning on by accident
Tip
When Keylock is on, your
handheld does not
respond when you press
the application buttons.
To use your handheld
again, press the power
button, and then tap
Deactivate Keylock.
Does your handheld turn itself on accidentally in your briefcase, pocket, or purse? You can lock the
buttons on the front of your handheld to prevent this from happening and to prevent the battery
from draining.
0
1
Open Keylock Preferences:
a. Go to the Home
b. Select Prefs
screen.
.
c. Select Keylock.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
313
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
2
Select one of these settings, and then select Done.
Never Keylock always remains off.
Automatic Keylock turns on automatically when you turn off your handheld or
when your handheld goes to sleep.
Manual Keylock turns on when you hold down the power button until the
system sound confirms that Keylock is on.
Done
Selecting power-saving settings
The Power Preferences screen enables you to set power consumption options.
0
1
Open Power Preferences:
a. Go to the Home
b. Select Prefs
screen.
.
c. Select Power.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
314
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
2
Tap the pick lists to change any of the following settings, and then select Done.
Auto-off after Select how quickly your handheld automatically turns off after a
period of inactivity: 30 seconds, 1 minute, 2 minutes, or 3 minutes.
On while charging Select whether your handheld stays on continuously when
it is connected to the power adapter. When this option is off, you can still turn
on your handheld to view your info while your handheld charges, but it turns off
automatically after a period of inactivity.
Beam Receive Select whether you can receive beamed information on your
handheld. Turn this setting on to receive beamed info or turn it off to prevent
receiving beamed info.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
315
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
Connecting your handheld to other devices
Connection Preferences let you connect your handheld to other devices. You can use preset
connection settings, modify the preset settings, or create your own connection settings from
scratch. The list of preset connections varies depending on the applications you’ve added to your
handheld.
»
Key Term
ISP Acronym for
Internet service provider.
This is the service you
use to connect to the
Internet, such as AOL,
Compuserve, or
Earthlink.
Did You Know?
You cannot rename or
delete the preset
connection settings.
For example, you can create a connection between the IR port
of your handheld and a modem so that you can dial in to your
ISP or corporate network. The modem can be attached to or
within a mobile phone or other device containing an IR port.
(Some infrared phones can act as modems. To set up a phone
connection, you must have a GSM or GPRS mobile phone
enabled with data services and a driver for your phone. Check
www.palmOne.com for available phone drivers or contact the
phone manufacturer.)
Changing the preset connection settings
The following steps show you how to adjust the communication speed in the preset IR to a PC/
Handheld connection setting. You can similarly edit other connections or settings.
0
1
Open Connection Preferences:
a. Go to the Home
b. Select Prefs
screen.
.
c. Select Connection.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
316
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
2
Open the Edit Connection dialog
box:
a. Select the IR to PC/handheld
connection.
b. Tap Edit.
3
Change the speed setting:
a. Tap Details.
b. Tap the Speed pick list and
select the appropriate speed.
c. Select OK.
d. Select OK again, and then
select Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
317
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
Creating your own connection settings
Tip
To delete a connection
that you created, select it
on the Connection
Preferences screen, and
then tap Delete.
If none of the preset connection settings are close to what you need, or if you’re already using all
the connections as they are, you can create a new connection.
0
1
From the Connection Preferences screen, tap New.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
318
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
2
Enter the basic settings:
Name Enter a name for your connection settings. This name will appear on
the Connection Preferences screen so that you can select your connection later.
Connect to Select the type of device you want to connect to: PC, Modem, or
Local Area Network.
Via Select the method you want to use to connect to the device you selected:
Cradle/Cable—the HotSync cable that came with your handheld; Infrared—the
IR port on your handheld.
NOTE The Dialing and Volume settings won’t appear unless you select
Modem as the Connect to setting.
Dialing
Select whether your modem uses TouchTone™ or Rotary dialing.
Volume Select the volume level for you modem’s speaker: Off, Low, Medium,
or High.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
319
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
3
Enter the details settings:
a. Tap Details.
b. Tap the Speed pick list and
select the appropriate speed.
c. Tap the Flow Ctl pick list and
select whether the connection
uses flow control:
Automatic
Your handheld determines when to use flow control.
On
Flow control is always on.
Off
Flow control is always off.
d. For a modem connection, enter the initialization string.
e. Select OK.
4
Select OK, and then select Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
320
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
Customizing network settings
[ ! ] Before You Begin
You need the following:
• A mobile phone with an
IR port (sold separately)
• A wireless service
provider account that
includes high-speed data
services or that supports
dial-up connections
(additional fees may
apply)
• An ISP account or a
corporate remote access
account (additional fees
may apply)
• Connection Preferences
settings for your mobile
phone enabled with IR
Your handheld includes software that lets you connect your handheld to your Internet service
provider (ISP) or to a dial-in (remote access) server using a mobile phone. After you configure
your network settings, you can establish a connection either by using the menus from the Network
Preferences screen or by using a third-party application.
Setting up a service profile
Service profiles store the network settings for your ISP or dial-in server. You can create, save, and
reuse service profiles. You can create additional service profiles from scratch or by duplicating an
existing profile and editing the information.
0
1
Open Network Preferences:
a. Go to the Home
b. Select Prefs
screen.
.
c. Select Network.
Continued
• An application on your
handheld that supports
viewing transmitted info,
such as an e-mail
application or web
browser (sold separately,
visit www.palmOne.com
for details)
Zire™ 31 Handheld
321
CHAPTER 20
Tip
Instead of creating a new
profile, you can copy an
existing profile and
change the settings.
Select the profile you
want to copy, and then
open the Service menu
and select Duplicate.
Customizing Your Handheld
2
Service Tap the Service pick list and select your ISP or your dial-in server type
from the list. If your ISP or server type isn’t on the list, tap New and enter a
name for the service profile.
User Name Enter your username. This is the part of your e-mail address that’s
before the @ sign and it’s the name that you use when you log in to your ISP or
your dial-in server. This field can contain multiple lines of text, but only two
lines appear onscreen.
Did You Know?
Most dial-in servers do
not accept spaces in the
username.
Tip
If you’re concerned about
security don’t enter a
password. Just leave the
word “Prompt” in the
Password box and your
handheld will ask you to
enter a password each
time you log in.
Enter the basic settings:
Password Enter the password you use to log in to your ISP or dial-in server,
and then tap OK. The word “Assigned” appears in this box and you don’t need
to enter a password when you log in.
Connection Tap the Connection pick list and select the method you want to
use to connect to your ISP or to a dial-in server. See Connecting your handheld
to other devices for info on creating and configuring connection settings.
3
If you’re using a phone or modem
connection, enter the phone
settings:
a. Tap the Phone box.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
322
CHAPTER 20
Tip
It’s a good idea to add at
least three commas
before your calling card
number to allow for the
cue delay. Each comma
delays transmission of
your calling card number
for two seconds.
Customizing Your Handheld
Cont’d.
b. Enter any of the following settings, and then tap OK:
Phone # Enter the phone number for your ISP or dial-in server.
Dial prefix Select the Dial prefix check box, and then enter the number that you
dial before the telephone number to access an outside line. For example, many
offices require that you first dial 9 to dial a number outside the building.
Disable call waiting If your phone has Call Waiting, select the Disable call
waiting check box, and then enter the code to disable Call Waiting. Call Waiting
can cause your session to end if you receive a call while you are connected.
Contact your local phone company for the code that is appropriate for you.
Use calling card If you want to use your calling card when dialing your ISP or
dial-in server, tap the Use calling card check box to select it. Enter your calling
card number on the Use calling card line.
[ ! ] IMPORTANT Because MCI works differently, enter the MCI calling card
number in the Phone # field and the phone number in the Use calling card field.
4
Tap Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
323
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
Connecting to your service
After you set up your Connection and Network Preferences, establishing a connection to your ISP
or your company’s network (dial-in server) is easy.
Tip
To see expanded Service
Connection Progress
messages, press Down
on the navigator.To see
more information, open
the Options menu and
select View Log.
0
1
Open Network Preferences:
a. Go to the Home
b. Select Prefs
screen.
.
c. Select Network.
2
Make the connection:
a. Make sure the service profile you want to use appears in the Service field.
If not, select it.
b. Tap Connect.
3
End the connection when you’re done using it:
a. Tap Disconnect.
b. Select Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
324
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
Adding details to a service profile
If you’re using one of the predefined service profiles, you probably need to enter only your
username, password, and telephone number. If you’re creating a new service profile, you may
need to use the Details dialog box to add more information to your service profile.
0
1
Open Network Preferences:
a. Go to the Home
b. Select Prefs
screen.
.
c. Select Network.
2
Open the Details dialog box:
a. Tap the Service pick list and
select the service you want to
add details to.
b. Tap Details.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
325
CHAPTER 20
»
Key Term
DNS Domain name
system. The Internet uses
this system to translate
the names of host
computers into IP
addresses. A DNS
number identifies the
server that handles the
translation.
Customizing Your Handheld
3
NOTE Ask your ISP or system administrator if you need information on any
of these settings.
Connection type Tap the pick list and choose the communication protocol for
this service: PPP, SLIP, or CSLIP. Most e-mail application use PPP or SLIP
protocols.
Idle timeout Tap the pick list and select how long your handheld waits before
dropping the connection with your ISP or dial-in server when you switch out of
an application that requires a connection: 1 Minute, 2 Minutes, 3 Minutes, or
Never.
Each IP address has four
numbers (from 0 to 255)
that are separated by
periods.
»
Key Term
IP Internet protocol.
Everyone who logs in to
the Internet needs a
unique identifier (an
IP address). Some
networks dynamically
assign a temporary IP
address upon login while
others assign a
permanent IP address.
Adjust any of the following settings:
Query DNS Select the Query DNS check box if you’re not sure whether you
need to enter DNS addresses. Many systems do not require that you enter DNS
addresses. If you do need DNS addresses, deselect the DNS check box, tap the
space to the left of each period in the Primary and Secondary DNS fields, and
then enter the appropriate sections of each address.
IP Address Select the IP Address check box to use a temporary IP address.
Deselect the IP Address check box to enter a permanently assigned address.
4
Select OK, and then select Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
326
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
Deleting a service profile
0
1
Open Network Preferences:
a. Go to the Home
b. Select Prefs
screen.
.
c. Select Network.
2
Delete the service you want to delete:
a. Tap the Service pick list and select the service you want to delete.
b. Open the menus
.
c. Select Delete on the Service menu.
d. Tap OK, and then tap Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
327
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
Creating login scripts
Tip
Windows You can also
create login scripts with a
text editor on your
desktop computer. Create
a file with the extension
PNC, and then install the
file on your handheld
using palmOne™ Quick
Install.
Did You Know?
Your login scripts can
also use non-ASCII and
literal characters.
A login script is a series of commands that automates logging in to a network server—for
example, your corporate network or your ISP. A login script is associated with a specific service
profile created in Network Preferences.
A login script is something that you are likely to receive from your system administrator if you log
in to the corporate servers from your handheld using a phone/modem or network connection. The
script is generally prepared by the system administrator and distributed to users who need it. It
automates the events that must take place to establish a connection between your handheld and
the corporate servers.
You can create login scripts by selecting commands from the Command pick list in the Login
Script dialog box. Some commands, such as Send, require you to supply additional information. If
the command requires additional info, a field appears to the right of the command where you can
enter the info.
0
1
Open Network Preferences:
a. Go to the Home
b. Select Prefs
screen.
.
c. Select Network.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
328
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
2
Open the Login Script dialog box:
a. Tap the Service pick list and select the service you want to add a script to.
b. Tap Details.
c. Tap Script.
3
Tap the End pick list and select one of the following commands from the list:
Wait For Tells your handheld to wait for specific characters from the server
before executing the next command.
Wait For Prompt Detects a challenge-response prompt coming from the
server, and then displays the dynamically generated challenge value. You then
enter the challenge value into your token card, which in turn generates a
response value for you to enter on your handheld. This is a two-part command
which is separated by a vertical bar (|) on the input line.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
329
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
Cont’d.
Send
Transmits specific characters to the server that you’re connecting to.
Send CR
Transmits a carriage return or line feed (LF) character to the server.
Send User ID
Transmits the User Name field from Network Preferences.
Send Password Transmits the Password field from Network Preferences. If you
didn’t enter a password, this command prompts you to enter one. The Password
command is usually followed by a Send CR command.
Delay Tells your handheld to wait a specific number of seconds before going to
the next command in the login script.
Get IP Reads an IP address and uses it as the IP address for your handheld.
This command is used with SLIP connections.
Prompt Opens a dialog box and prompts you to enter certain text (for
example, a password or a security code).
GPRS Sets up GPRS connections on various wireless networks. You should
not have to use these commands.
End
Identifies the last line in the login script.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
330
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
4
Complete the script:
a. Repeat step 3 until the login script is complete.
b. Select OK, and then select OK again.
c. Select Done.
Done
Adding plug-in applications
Tip
For more info on creating
plug-in applications,
contact Developer
Support at PalmSource.
You can create plug-in applications containing script commands that extend the functionality of
the built-in script commands. A plug-in application is a standard PRC application that you install
on your handheld just like any other application. After you install the plug-in application, you can
use the new script commands in a login script.
For example, you might use a plug-in application in the following situations:
• You need the login script to properly respond to different connection scenarios defined by the
authentication server.
• You want to perform conditional tests and branching as part of the login process.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
331
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
Plug-in applications have the following characteristics:
• Written in C language
• Compiled into a device executable
• Called properly from a login script
• Able to return control to a login script after it terminates
• Created using a development environment that supports Palm OS® software, such as
Metrowerks CodeWarrior tools.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
332
CHAPTER 20
Customizing Your Handheld
Related topics
My Handheld
Make your handheld
uniquely yours. For great
tips, software, accessories,
and more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
myzire31.
Support
If you’re having problems
with customization or with
anything else on your
handheld, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support/zire31.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Click the link below to learn about these related topics:
Exploring
Locating the input area and other controls on your handheld
Moving
Around
• Opening applications
• Using menus
Entering
Information
• Using Graffiti 2 writing to enter information
• Using ShortCuts to quickly enter text phrases
Photos
Copying photos to your handheld or an expansion card
Privacy
Keeping information private by locking your handheld with a password
Categories
Creating categories so you can organize your applications and information
World Clock
Viewing the date and time in other cities
333
CHAPTER 21
Managing Clock Settings
In this chapter
Checking the current date
and time
Setting the primary location
Choosing secondary
locations for other time
zones
Forget your watch? Or just forget to
reset it when you landed in Toronto?
Neither matters, as long as you have
your handheld. Not only can you rely
on it for the correct time, you can even
set an alarm so you don’t miss that
early flight back home.
Modifying the locations list
Setting the alarm clock
Changing the clock display
Related topics
Benefits of World Clock
• Always have the correct time, no
matter where you are
• No need to carry a separate alarm
clock
Zire™ 31 Handheld
334
CHAPTER 21
Managing Clock Settings
Checking the current date and time
There are several ways to easily check the date and time:
• When your handheld is on:
• Tap the Home icon
, and then select the World Clock icon
.
• Tap the Clock icon in the upper-left corner of the input area. Your handheld displays the time
for two seconds, and then returns to the previous application.
Clock
• When your handheld is off, press Select in the center of the navigator. Your handheld turns on,
displays the time, and then turns off after a few seconds.
Select
Zire™ 31 Handheld
335
CHAPTER 21
Managing Clock Settings
Setting the primary location
»
Key Term
Primary location
Typically a city in the time
zone in which you live.
In World Clock, you can set the location, date, and time for a primary location. The settings for this
primary location are used by all of the applications on your handheld.
0.
1
Go to the Home screen
2
Select the primary location:
and select World Clock
a. Tap the primary location pick
list.
.
Primary location
pick list
b. Select the location you want
to be the primary location.
If you need more choices,
modify the locations list.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
336
CHAPTER 21
Managing Clock Settings
Setting the date and time for the primary location
Did You Know?
When the Daylight
Savings settings are
active, the time changes
according to the rule for
the primary location. For
example, in North
America, the time
changes at 2:00 a.m.; in
Europe, it changes at
1:00 a.m.
You can set the date and time in Preferences, as you did during the initial setup of your handheld,
or in World Clock. When you change the date and time in one application, it is automatically
changed in the other.
0
1
Go to the Home screen
2
Tap Set Date & Time.
3
Set the date:
and select World Clock
a. Tap the Date box.
.
Year
Month
b. Tap the arrows to select the
current year.
c. Tap the current month.
Day
d. Tap the current date.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
337
CHAPTER 21
Managing Clock Settings
4
Set the time:
a. Tap the Set Time box.
Hour
b. Tap the hour and minute
boxes, and then tap the
arrows to change them.
Minute
c. Tap AM or PM, and then
select OK.
5
Select Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
338
CHAPTER 21
Managing Clock Settings
Choosing secondary locations for other time zones
Tip
If you have friends,
family, or colleagues in
another time zone, select
a city in their zone as your
secondary location.
When you need to
contact them, you can
easily check to see what
time it is where they are.
Set World Clock to display the date and time for two other locations.
0
1
2
Go to the Home screen
and select World Clock
.
Tap the pick list next to one of the
secondary locations.
Pick list
3
Select the location you want to use as the new secondary location.
If you need more choices, modify the locations list.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
339
CHAPTER 21
Managing Clock Settings
Modifying the locations list
Tip
If you know what you’re
looking for in a long pick
list, use Graffiti® 2
writing to find it faster.
Enter the first letter of the
word, then locate your
item.
You can edit the locations list so that the locations you use most often are easy to find.
Adding new locations
0
1
Go to the Home screen
2
Open the Edit List dialog box:
and select World Clock
.
a. Tap a Location pick list.
b. Select Edit List.
3
Add the new location:
a. Tap Add.
b. Scroll through the list to
select a location that is in the
same time zone as the city
you want to add.
c. Select OK.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
340
CHAPTER 21
Managing Clock Settings
4
[ & ] OPTIONAL Tap each
setting you want to change.
Name Enter the name of the
location.
Time Zone Select the time
zone for the location.
Daylight Saving Time check
box Tap for your handheld to
automatically adjust the date and
time for Daylight Saving Time in
this location.
Start and End dates Tap the
boxes to change the start and
end dates of Daylight Saving
Time, if necessary.
5
Select OK, and then select Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
341
CHAPTER 21
Managing Clock Settings
Deleting a location
0
1
2
Go to the Home screen
and select World Clock
.
Select the location you want to
delete:
a. Tap a Location pick list.
b. Select Edit List.
c. Select a location, and then tap
Remove.
3
Select OK, and then select Done.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
342
CHAPTER 21
Managing Clock Settings
Setting the alarm clock
Did You Know?
Use World Clock to set an
alarm within the next 24
hours. Set alarms outside
of this timeframe in
Calendar.
Did You Know?
Remember to put your
handheld on local time. If
you travel from San
Francisco to London,
make London your
primary location so that
all your alarms ring on
time, instead of eight
hours late.
0
1
Go to the Home screen
2
Set the alarm:
and select World Clock
.
a. Tap the Alarm box.
b. Tap the time columns to set the hour and minute, and then select OK.
NOTE Alarms set in World Clock use the time set for the primary location.
Alarm box
Tip
Set an alarm while you’re
working to remind you
when to leave to get to
your appointment on
time.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
343
CHAPTER 21
Tip
To turn off an alarm
before it sounds, tap the
Alarm box, and then tap
Alarm Off.
Managing Clock Settings
3
[ & ] OPTIONAL
Select the alarm sound and volume:
a. Open the menus
.
b. Select Options, and then select Alarm Preferences.
c. Tap the pick lists to select the alarm sound and volume.
NOTE This volume setting does not affect the other sounds on your
handheld, including the alarms you set in Calendar. You can change the volume
of these other sounds in Preferences.
d. Select OK.
Done
Responding to the alarm clock
When the World Clock alarm sounds, select one of these three options:
OK Cancel the reminder message and return to the current screen.
Snooze Close the alarm reminder message and return to the current screen. The message
appears again in five minutes. In the meantime, an indicator blinks in the upper-left corner of the
screen to remind you of the upcoming alarm.
Go To
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Cancel the reminder message and open World Clock.
344
CHAPTER 21
Managing Clock Settings
Changing the clock display
0
1
Go to the Home screen
2
Open the Display Options dialog box:
a. Open the menus
and select World Clock
.
.
b. Select Options, and then select Display Options.
3
Select any of the following options, and then select OK:
Show Multiple Locations Display the secondary locations. Deselect it to
display only the primary location.
Show Date Display the date in World Clock.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
345
CHAPTER 21
Managing Clock Settings
Related topics
Community
To explore the world of your
handheld, go to
www.palmOne.com/
myzire31.
Support
If you’re having problems
with World Clock or anything
else on your handheld, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support/zire31.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Moving around
• Opening applications
• Using menus
Calendar
Setting an alarm outside of the next 24 hours
Customizing
Changing the volume of other system sounds
346
CHAPTER 22
Maintaining Your Handheld
Your handheld is designed to be rugged and reliable and to provide you with
years of trouble-free service. Taking care of your handheld helps keep it working
properly and ensures that it’s available when you need it.
Handheld do’s and don’ts
To protect your handheld from damage and ensure reliable performance, follow these guidelines.
Handheld do’s
• Use the protective cover that came with your handheld. It protects your handheld screen from
being scratched.
• Use only the stylus to tap the screen—no pens, pencils, paper clips, or other sharp objects.
• Use only the supplied power adapter to charge your handheld.
• Keep the battery charged.
• Keep the screen free of dust (or anything else that could make it dirty).
• For general cleaning, use a soft, damp cloth. If the screen becomes dirty, use a soft cloth
moistened with a diluted window-cleaning solution.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
347
CHAPTER 22
Maintaining Your Handheld
• Use only 3.5 mm stereo headphones in your handheld’s headphone jack.
• Be sure to get rid of any static electricity buildup before you connect your handheld to any cable
or accessory.
Handheld don’ts
• Do not drop, bang, or otherwise cause a strong impact to your handheld.
• Do not carry your handheld in your back pocket; you might sit on it by mistake.
• Do not let your handheld get wet; don’t even leave it in a damp location.
• Do not expose your handheld to very hot or cold temperatures, including placing it near a
heater, leaving it in a car, or setting it by a window in direct sunlight.
Resetting your handheld
On rare occasions your handheld may not respond when you press a button or tap the screen. In
this case, you need to reset your handheld.
Doing a soft reset
A soft reset tells your handheld to stop what it’s doing and start over again. None of your
information will be lost. After a soft reset, a screen appears that lets you reset the date and time, if
needed.
To do a soft reset, use the tip of an unfolded paper clip (or similar object without a sharp tip) to
gently press the reset button inside the hole on the back panel of your handheld.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
348
CHAPTER 22
Maintaining Your Handheld
Reset button
If a soft reset does not unfreeze your handheld, you need to do a hard reset.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
349
CHAPTER 22
Maintaining Your Handheld
Doing a hard reset
Only do a hard reset if a soft reset doesn’t solve your problem, or if you want to clear all of your
information from your handheld.
[ ! ] IMPORTANT A hard reset deletes all records and entries stored on your handheld, including
the username that identifies the handheld. Before you do a hard reset, be sure to synchronize.
0
1
2
3
4
Press and hold the power button.
While holding the power button, use the tip of an unfolded paper clip (or a
similar object without a sharp tip) to gently press and release the reset button
inside the hole on the back of your handheld.
Wait for the Palm Powered™ logo to appear, then release the power button.
When you see the message that warns you about erasing all of the info on your
handheld, do one of the following:
• Press Up on the navigator to finish the reset and show the Digitizer screen.
• Press any other button to do a soft reset.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
350
CHAPTER 22
Maintaining Your Handheld
Restoring your information after a hard reset
If you synchronized before doing a hard reset, you can now put that information back on your
handheld. However, you may need to re-enter some of your personal settings, as well as your
color-coded categories in Calendar.
WINDOWS ONLY
0
1
Open the Custom menu in the HotSync® application:
a. Click the HotSync Manager
the screen.
icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of
b. Click Custom.
2
Select the correct username from the list at the top of the box.
Continued
Zire™ 31 Handheld
351
CHAPTER 22
Maintaining Your Handheld
3
Set the transfer options:
a. Select an application in the
Conduit list, and then click
Change.
b. Select Desktop overwrites
handheld.
NOTE This change applies
only to the next synchronization.
c. Click OK.
4
5
Repeat step 3 for the other applications in the list that you want to restore, and
then click Done.
Synchronize your handheld with your computer.
Done
Zire™ 31 Handheld
352
CHAPTER 22
Maintaining Your Handheld
Related topics
Community
To explore the world of your
handheld, go to
www.palmOne.com/
myzire31.
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Synchronizing
Creating a backup of your information
Customizing
Customizing your handheld again after doing a hard reset
Support
If you’re having problems
with resets or with anything
else on your handheld, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support/zire31.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
353
CHAPTER 23
Common Questions
Although we can’t anticipate all the questions you might have, this chapter
provides answers to some of the most commonly asked questions.
Setup
Nothing happens when I insert the CD.
WINDOWS ONLY
1. Click Start on your computer, and then select Run.
2. Click Browse and navigate to your CD-ROM drive.
3. Select Autorun, click Open, and then click OK.
I cannot install Palm Desktop software.
WINDOWS ONLY
• Disable any virus-scanning software on your computer.
• Close any open applications.
• Make sure your computer has at least 60MB of disk space available.
• Delete all temporary files.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
354
CHAPTER 23
Common Questions
• Run ScanDisk (or another disk verification tool) on your computer.
• Install the latest Windows software updates to your computer.
• If you are upgrading from an older Palm OS® handheld, remove any previous version(s) of
Palm® Desktop software by clicking Start, navigating to Settings, and clicking Control Panel. Click
Add or Remove Programs.
• Uninstall and then reinstall the current version of Palm Desktop software.
MAC ONLY
• Disable any virus-scanning software on your computer.
• Quit any open applications.
• Make sure your computer has at least 60MB of disk space available.
• Install the latest Mac software updates to your computer.
• If you are upgrading from an older Palm OS® handheld, remove any previous version(s) of
Palm Desktop software.
• Uninstall and then reinstall the current version of Palm Desktop software.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
355
CHAPTER 23
Common Questions
Handheld
[ ! ] IMPORTANT Do not open your handheld; there are no serviceable parts inside. Opening your
handheld voids the warranty and is not recommended under any circumstances.
I want to see how much battery life I have left.
A battery gauge
appears at the top of the Home screen. Check the gauge periodically to see if
your handheld needs to be recharged. If the battery becomes low, a message appears on the
screen prompting you to recharge the battery.
I’m not sure when I need to recharge my handheld.
We recommend that you recharge your handheld for at least half an hour every day. Ideally,
connect your handheld to a power source every night and recharge it while you sleep.
My battery is drained.
If the battery is drained to the point that you cannot turn on your handheld, your information is
safely stored for approximately five days. In this case, there is enough residual energy in the
battery to store the information but not enough to turn on your handheld. If your handheld does
not turn on when you press the power button, you should recharge it immediately, for a few
hours.
My battery drains too quickly.
You can conserve battery life by doing any of the following:
• Reduce the brightness of the display.
• Reduce the Auto-off after interval.
• Use Keylock Preferences to prevent your handheld from being turned on accidentally.
• Minimize use of the expansion card slot.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
356
CHAPTER 23
Common Questions
When I connect my handheld to the power adapter,
it does not charge.
• Confirm that your handheld is firmly connected to the power adapter.
• Confirm that your power adapter is plugged into an AC outlet that has power.
A lightning bolt over the battery icon indicates that your handheld is charging.
My handheld is frozen.
Tip
After a soft reset, the
Preferences screen
appears with the Date &
Time option highlighted
so you can reset the date
and time if necessary.
Tip
When you purge or delete
items, you are given the
option to save an archive
copy on your computer
the next time you
synchronize.
On rare occasions your handheld may not respond when you press a button or tap the screen. In
this case, you need to reset your handheld. A soft reset tells your handheld to stop and start over
again. This does not affect any of the information or applications on your handheld.
NOTE If you had a network connection that was cut off, your handheld may appear to be
frozen for up to 30 seconds. Wait 30 seconds before performing a soft reset.
If a soft reset does not unfreeze your handheld, you need to perform a hard reset.
If your handheld continues to freeze after a reset, check your third-party applications for
incompatible applications.
I don’t see anything on my handheld’s screen.
• Press an application button to ensure that your handheld is turned on.
• If your handheld was exposed to cold, make sure it is at room temperature.
• Charge your handheld.
• Perform a soft reset. If your handheld still doesn’t turn on, perform a hard reset.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
357
CHAPTER 23
Common Questions
I get a warning message telling me my handheld memory is full.
• If you have installed additional applications on your handheld, remove them to recover memory.
• Purge items from Calendar and Tasks. This deletes Tasks items and past Calendar events from
the memory of your handheld.
• Delete unused memos, photos, and other items, or save them to an expansion card.
My handheld keeps turning itself off.
Your handheld is designed to turn itself off after a period of inactivity. This period can be set at 30
seconds or at one, two, or three minutes. Check the Auto-off after setting on the Power Preferences
screen.
My handheld is not making any sounds.
Check the System, Alarm, and Game Sound settings.
The current date and time are incorrect.
The current date and time are tied to the Location setting. If you change the date and time without
changing the Location setting, the current date and time may appear incorrect.
Moving around
I can’t find the icon I want on the Home screen.
• Tap the pick list in the upper-right corner of the Home screen and select All. You may need to
scroll down a bit, but you should now see an icon for each of the applications on your handheld.
• Some of the applications that come with your handheld are not preinstalled. You need to install
these extra applications from the CD.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
358
CHAPTER 23
Common Questions
• If you have an expansion card inserted in the expansion slot on your handheld, the application
you want may be installed on the card instead of on your handheld. To view the applications
installed on the card, tap the pick list in the upper-right corner of the Home screen and select the
expansion card’s name from the list.
Entering information
My handheld doesn’t respond to taps correctly.
If your handheld is not responding to taps correctly, you need to align the screen.
When I tap the Menu icon, nothing happens.
• Align the screen and try tapping the Menu icon again.
• If nothing happens, you may be in an application or screen that does not use menus. Switch to a
different application and try tapping the Menu icon. If it works in the second application, then
the first does not use menus.
• If the Menu icon does not respond to taps in the second application, try aligning the screen
again.
I can’t get my handheld to recognize my handwriting.
For your handheld to recognize handwriting input with the stylus, you need to use Graffiti® 2
writing. Use the Graffiti 2 help to learn how to write characters.
NOTE Your handheld recognizes your own personal handwriting in the Note Pad application
only.
• Make the Graffiti 2 character strokes in the Graffiti 2 input area, not on the display part of the
screen. If you want to write on the display part of the screen, turn full-screen writing on.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
359
CHAPTER 23
Common Questions
• Write Graffiti 2 strokes for lowercase letters in the left side, strokes for capital letters in the
middle, and strokes for numbers in the right side of the Graffiti 2 writing area.
• Make sure that Graffiti 2 is not in shift mode.
• Make sure that Graffiti 2 is not in Punctuation Shift mode.
The info I entered does not appear in an application.
• Check the Categories pick list in the upper-right corner of the application screen. Select All to
display all the records for the application.
• Did you set private records to be hidden? Check Security Preferences to see that Private Records
is set to Show private records.
• Open the Options menu and select Preferences. Make sure Show Completed Tasks is selected.
I don’t know how to save the info I entered in an application.
Each time you complete an entry such as a contact, memo, or note, your handheld automatically
saves the information you entered. You don’t have to do anything special to save your info. To
protect your info and create a backup of your info, we recommend that you synchronize your
handheld with your computer often.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
360
CHAPTER 23
Common Questions
Synchronizing
I can’t synchronize my handheld with my computer.
Tip
Need more help with
synchronizing your
handheld? Open
Palm Desktop software,
go to the Help menu and
select HotSync Online
Troubleshooting Guide.
• Make sure the HotSync® cable is connected
securely.
• Make sure the date on your computer matches the
date on your handheld.
• Read the HotSync log for the user account for
which you are synchronizing.
WINDOWS ONLY
Click the HotSync Manager
icon in the Windows
taskbar in the lower-right corner of your screen. Make
sure Local USB has a checkmark next to it. If not,
click it.
NOTE If you don’t see the HotSync Manager icon, click Start on the Windows taskbar, and then
select Programs. Go to the Palm Desktop program group and select HotSync Manager.
MAC ONLY
• Make sure HotSync Manager is enabled: Open the palmOne folder and double-click the HotSync
Manager icon. On the HotSync Controls tab, be sure Enabled is selected. If it is not, click it.
• Disconnect the HotSync cable from your computer, and then reconnect the cable and restart
your computer.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
361
CHAPTER 23
Common Questions
When I tap to synchronize, nothing happens on Palm Desktop
software, and my handheld times out.
• Perform a soft reset.
• Make sure that HotSync manager is running on your computer.
• Make a copy of the folder containing your information. This folder is named with either your full
username or a shortened version of the name. Uninstall and then reinstall Palm Desktop
software.
• Turn on your handheld, and go to the Home
Local.
screen. Select HotSync
, and then tap
I can’t synchronize my handheld with Microsoft Outlook.
WINDOWS ONLY
NOTE If you choose to synchronize your handheld with Outlook, information from Contacts,
Calendar, Tasks, and Memos is synchronized with Outlook. Other information, such as photos and
notes, is synchronized with Palm Desktop software.
• Click the HotSync Manager icon
and select Custom. Check the following:
• Make sure that you have the correct username selected from the drop-down list.
• Make sure that the applications you want are set to synchronize the files. If not, select each
application, click Change, and then choose Synchronize the files.
• Make sure that the correct application name is selected. For example, the older version of
Calendar was called Date Book. If you have upgraded from an older handheld, make sure that
that Calendar is set to Synchronize the files, and Date Book is set to Do Nothing.
• If you synchronize your handheld with more than one computer, click Settings and select
Enable synchronization to multiple PCs for each application you want to synchronize. This
helps avoid duplicating the same information on a single computer.
NOTE Click the Set as default check box to use this setting each time you synchronize.
Otherwise, it applies during the next synchronization only.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
362
CHAPTER 23
Common Questions
• Be sure that the application you want is installed. Reinstall the HotSync Manager and make sure
that the application is selected.
• Reinstall Palm Desktop software and select the option to synchronize with Microsoft Outlook.
One or more of my applications does not synchronize.
If you have synchronized successfully but you can’t find the information from your handheld on
your computer, check to see that you have the correct username selected for viewing data.
NOTE If you upgraded from a previous handheld, go to www.palmOne.com/support/intl,
select your country, select the Zire™ 31 handheld from the main page, and click the Upgrade link.
WINDOWS ONLY
Click the HotSync Manager icon
in the lower-right corner of your screen, and then select
Custom. Check that the application is set to synchronize the files. If it is not, select the application,
click Change, and then choose Synchronize the files. Click the Set as default check box to use this
setting each time you synchronize. Otherwise, it applies during the next synchronization only.
MAC ONLY
Double-click the HotSync Manager icon
in the palmOne folder. From the HotSync menu, select
Conduit Settings. Select your username from the User pop-up menu, and be sure that the
application is set to synchronize.
I can’t open the HotSync Manager.
Make a backup copy of your Palm Desktop data by opening the palmOne (Windows) or Palm (Mac)
folder on your computer, selecting the folder with your username, copying the folder to another
location, and then renaming the folder. Then reinstall Palm Desktop software.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
363
CHAPTER 23
Common Questions
When I synchronize, I receive the 8009 error message: An application
has failed to respond to a HotSync notification.
WINDOWS ONLY
The 8009 error indicates that the Windows registry is corrupt. You need to rebuild the HotSync
Manager registry entries. For information on rebuilding the registry entries, go to
www.palmOne.com/support/intl and search the palmOne Knowledge Library for “error 8009.”
My files didn’t install during synchronization.
• If files do not install after you synchronize, the file type was not recognized. On your handheld,
open the application associated with those files. Then synchronize again. If the files remain in
the palmOne™ Quick Install list, they are not associated with an application on your handheld
and cannot be installed.
• If you are trying to install files to an expansion card, make sure that a card is inserted into your
handheld’s expansion slot before you synchronize.
I can’t add more files to the palmOne™ Quick Install list.
Make sure the dialog box that confirms where the files will be installed is closed. You cannot add
more files to the list when the confirmation dialog box is open.
When I add a zipped file (ZIP) to Quick Install, no files appear in the
Quick Install list.
Unzip the file with a file compression utility, such as WinZip, and then add the unzipped files to
Quick Install.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
364
CHAPTER 23
Common Questions
I can’t synchronize using the IR port.
• On your handheld, be sure the HotSync application is set to Local, with the option IR to
PC/Handheld.
• Be sure the IR port of your handheld is aligned directly opposite to, and within a few inches of,
the infrared device of your computer.
• Synchronizing using the IR port does not work after you receive a low battery warning. Recharge
your handheld.
• Set some applications to Do Nothing to speed synchronization. IR synchronization speeds can be
slow. Synchronizing with photos or MP3 files can take up to an hour or more.
WINDOWS ONLY
• On a computer running Windows 98, be sure that the HotSync Manager is running, that Infrared
is selected on the HotSync Manager menu, and that the Serial Port for local operations is set to
the simulated port for infrared communication.
• On a computer running Windows 2000/ME/XP, select Infrared in the HotSync Manager.
MAC ONLY
Make sure the infrared communications extensions have been installed in the Extensions folder
inside the System folder. Next, open the HotSync Software Setup window, and be sure that
HotSync Manager is enabled and that the Local Setup Port is set to Infrared Port.
I do not see an infrared option when I open HotSync Manager.
First check your computer’s documentation to see if your computer supports IR communication. If
it does not, you cannot synchronize your handheld with your computer using the IR port.
If your computer does support IR communication, follow these steps:
1. Click the HotSync Manager icon in the taskbar
Zire™ 31 Handheld
in the lower-right corner of your screen.
365
CHAPTER 23
Common Questions
2. Make sure that Local Serial is selected.
3. Select Setup.
4. Click the Local tab.
5. In the Serial Port drop-down box, select the port your computer uses for infrared
communication. See the documentation for your operating system for instructions on finding
this port. This information is usually located in the Control Panel.
6. Click OK.
My handheld displays the message “Waiting for sender” when it’s
near my computer’s infrared port.
• Your computer’s infrared port may be set to search automatically for the presence of other
infrared devices. Consult the documentation for your operating system for information about
turning off this option.
• In most cases, simply moving your handheld away from the computer’s infrared port solves the
problem.
My handheld appears to freeze when I place it near my computer.
Move your handheld away from the computer’s infrared port.
I want to synchronize my computer with more than one handheld.
If the computer running Palm Desktop software synchronizes with more than one handheld, each
handheld should have a unique name. Synchronizing more than one handheld with the same
username causes unpredictable results and, potentially, loss of your personal information. Assign
a username to your handheld the first time you synchronize.
If you are synchronizing with Outlook, make sure the right profile is selected for the applications
you want to synchronize in HotSync Manager. From the Palm Desktop home screen, click the
HotSync Manager, and then select Custom.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
366
CHAPTER 23
Common Questions
Calendar
I tapped the Today button, but it does not show the correct date.
Make sure the Set Date box on the Date & Time Preferences screen displays the current date.
I created an event, but it doesn’t appear in the Week View.
• If scroll arrows appear on the right of your screen, scroll down to see if the event appears further
down the screen.
• If you have two or more events with the same start time, the first event created appears as a
gray bar, and any subsequent conflicting events appear as a single red bar. To see the
overlapping events select the Day View. For more information, see Spotting event conflicts.
• If you marked the event as private, check Security Preferences to see that Private Records is set
to Show private records.
Memos
I’m having problems listing memos the way I want to see them.
If you cannot manually arrange the order of memos on the list screen, open the Options menu and
select Preferences. Make sure that Sort by is set to Manual.
If you choose to view your memos alphabetically on Palm Desktop software and then synchronize,
the memos on your handheld still appear in the order defined in the Preferences setting. In other
words, the sort settings you use with Palm Desktop software are not transferred to your handheld.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
367
CHAPTER 23
Common Questions
Notes
I’m having problems listing notes the way I want to see them.
If you cannot manually arrange the order of notes on the list screen, select Preferences from the
Options menu and make sure that Sort by is set to Manual.
If you choose to view your notes alphabetically on Palm Desktop software and then synchronize,
the notes on your handheld still appear in the order defined in the Preferences setting. In other
words, the sort settings you use with Palm Desktop software are not transferred to your handheld.
Photos
I can’t find the Photos icon on the Home screen.
• Tap the pick list in the upper-right corner of the Home screen and select All. You may need to
scroll down a bit, but you should now see an icon for each of the applications on your handheld.
• Photos is not preinstalled on your handheld. You need to install Photos from the CD.
RealOne
I would like better-quality sound during playback.
You can save music files in either MP3 or RMJ format. RMJ is a proprietary format used by the
RealOne desktop. In either case, saving at a lower bit rate creates a smaller file size, but also gives
a lower playback quality. Increase the bit rate to improve playback sound quality, but remember
that this increases file size.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
368
CHAPTER 23
Common Questions
When I save songs from a CD, I do not see the song title or artist
name.
When capturing songs from a CD, you must have an active Internet connection to obtain song title
and artist information. This information is supplied from the GraceNote server on the web.
Tasks
The info I entered does not appear in an application.
• Open the Options menu and select Preferences. If Show Completed Tasks is selected, deselect it
to display the missing tasks.
• If you marked the task as private, check Security Preferences to see that Private Records is set to
Show private records.
Privacy
I forgot the password, and my handheld is not locked.
First, use the password hint to try to remember the password. If this doesn’t help or if you do not
have a password hint, you can use Security Preferences to delete the password, but your handheld
deletes all entries marked as private. However, if you synchronize before you delete the password,
the synchronization process backs up all entries, whether or not they are marked private. Then you
can follow these steps to restore your private entries:
1. Tap Lost Password in Security Preferences and tap in the password box to remove the
password and delete all private records.
2. Synchronize your handheld with your computer again.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
369
CHAPTER 23
Common Questions
I forgot the password, and my handheld is locked.
First, use the password hint to try to remember the password. If this doesn’t help or if you do not
have a password hint, you must perform a hard reset to continue using your handheld.
Sharing
I can’t beam information to another handheld or other device.
NOTE Depending on the receiving handheld model, not all information may be sent correctly.
• If you are beaming to another Palm OS® handheld, confirm that your handheld and the other
handheld are 4 to 39 inches (approximately ten centimeters to one meter) apart and that the path
between the two handhelds is clear of obstacles. Beaming distances to other devices with an IR
port may be different.
• Move your handheld closer to the receiving device.
• Make sure the receiving device has beam receive enabled.
• Perform a soft reset on both your handheld and the receiving device.
When someone beams information to my handheld, it doesn‘t receive
the info.
• If you are receiving info from another Palm OS® handheld, confirm that your handheld and the
other handheld are 4 to 39 inches (approximately ten centimeters to one meter) apart and that
the path between the two handhelds is clear of obstacles. Beaming distances to other devices
with an IR port may be different.
• Move your handheld closer to the sending device.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
370
CHAPTER 23
Common Questions
• Make sure your handheld has beam receive enabled.
• Perform a soft reset on both your handheld and the receiving device.
When someone beams data to my handheld, I get a message telling
me it is out of memory.
• Your handheld requires at least twice the amount of memory available as the data you are
receiving. For example, if you are receiving a 30KB application, you must have at least 60KB
free.
• Purge old Calendar events and delete unused or unnecessary applications.
Problems with incompatible applications
palmOne, Inc. works with developers of third-party add-on applications to ensure the
compatibility of these applications with your handheld. Some third-party applications, however,
may not have been upgraded to be compatible with your handheld.
Possible symptoms of incompatible applications include:
• Fatal errors needing resets
• Frozen handheld requiring a reset
• Slow performance
• Abnormal screen display or uneven sound quality
• Problems using features
• Problems opening an application
• Problems synchronizing
Zire™ 31 Handheld
371
CHAPTER 23
Common Questions
You can determine whether an incompatible application is causing problems by deleting the
application and then operating your handheld.
After you have deleted the application, try to replicate the operation that created the error. If
removing the application solves your problem, contact the application developer for a solution.
Finding a third-party application that is causing a problem
If you have multiple third-party applications installed on your handheld or have upgraded from an
earlier model of a Palm OS® handheld, perform the following procedure to remove all third-party
applications from your handheld. Once you have removed all of the third-party applications, you
can install one application at a time to determine which application is causing the problem.
The following procedures erase all data from your handheld. Before removing the applications,
synchronize to back up your data.
1. Open the palmOne folder on your computer.
2. Open the user folder for your handheld. User folder names are often abbreviated as lastname
firstinitial.
3. Select and drag the Backup folder to the Windows desktop. Make sure you see the Backup
folder on the Windows desktop.
4. Close the palmOne folder.
5. Perform a hard reset, and then synchronize your handheld with your computer.
6. Operate your handheld and try to replicate problem operations.
7. Do one of the following:
•
Zire™ 31 Handheld
If your handheld still has problems, review this Common Questions section for solutions to
the problem. Fix the problem before reinstalling the third-party applications.
372
CHAPTER 23
Common Questions
•
If your handheld no longer has problems, install the third-party applications one application
at a time using the following procedure:
a. Open the Backup folder you moved to the Windows desktop in step 3.
b. Double-click a PRC file. The palmOne™ Quick Install window opens with the PRC file
listed.
c. Click Done.
d. Synchronize your handheld with your computer.
e. Operate your handheld and try to replicate problem operations.
f. Do one of the following:
Zire™ 31 Handheld
•
If installing the application re-creates your problem, remove the application and
contact the application developer for a solution. Continue to reinstall your
applications one application at a time to make sure another application is not creating
a problem.
•
If installing the application does not cause a problem, go to step a and reinstall
another application.
373
CHAPTER 24
Getting Help
This guide is meant to tell you everything you need to know to set up, customize,
and use your handheld. However, you may occasionally run into an issue that is
not addressed in this guide. Here are some resources to help you if that happens.
Self-help resources
If you run into a problem with your handheld, be sure to check these resources first:
• Answers to common questions about your handheld and its features
• The Palm Desktop online Help
• The Palm Desktop Software for the Macintosh User’s Guide located in the Documentation folder
on your installation CD
• The palmOne™ Knowledge Library, accessible at www.palmOne.com/support/zire31
• The most recent palmOne Zire™ 31 handheld HelpNotes on your regional web site
Zire™ 31 Handheld
374
CHAPTER 24
Getting Help
Technical support
If, after reviewing the self-help resources, you cannot solve your problem, go to
www.palmOne.com/support/zire31 or send an e-mail to your regional Technical Support office.
Before requesting technical support, please experiment a bit to reproduce and isolate the problem.
When you do contact Technical Support, please provide the following information:
• The name and version of the desktop operating system you are using
• The actual error message or state you are experiencing
• The steps you take to reproduce the problem
• The version of handheld software you are using and available memory
To find version and memory information, follow these steps:
1. Go to the Home
screen.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Info from the App menu.
4. Select Version for version info, and Size for memory info.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
375
Product Regulatory Information
FCC Statement
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
The use of shielded I/O cables is required when connecting this equipment to any and all optional peripheral
or host devices. Failure to do so may violate FCC rules.
[ ! ] IMPORTANT Changes or modifications not covered in this manual must be approved in writing by the
manufacturer’s Regulatory Engineering Department. Changes or modifications made without written
approval may void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
Responsible Party:
Zire™ Product Family
palmOne, Inc.
400 N. McCarthy Blvd.
Milpitas, California 95035
United States of America
(408) 503-7500
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Tested to Comply
With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
376
Canadian ICES-003 Statement
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment
Regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Réglement sur le matériel brouilleur
du Canada.
CE Compliance Statement
This product was tested by palmOne, Inc. and found to comply with all the requirements of the EMC Directive
89/336/EEC as amended.
Declaration of Conformity
palmOne, Inc., Declares the Product:Handheld PDA & HotSync® cable
Model Name/Number:
Zire 31
Manufacturer’s Name:
palmOne
Manufacturer’s Address:
400 N. McCarthy Blvd.
Milpitas, 95035-5112
Conforms with the following specifications:
• EN 55024: 1998 (Emissions & Immunity)
• EN55022:1998, CISPR 22 1997, Class B Radiated and Conducted Emissions
• IEC 61000-4-2, A1 1998-01, ESD Immunity, 4kV Contact, and 8kV Air Discharge
• IEC 61000-4-3: 1995 RF Immunity, 80-1000MHz, 3V/M, 1kHz, 80% A.M.
• ENV 50204:1996, RF Immunity, 895-905MHz, 3V/m, 200Hz, 50% AM
• IEC 61000-4-4: 1995 EFT Immunity, 1kV on AC port, 5/50nSec, 5kHs Rep. Freq.
• IEC 61000-4-5: 1995 Surge Immunity, 1.2/50uSec, 2kV(peak), Common Mode, 1kV(peak) Differential Mode
Zire™ 31 Handheld
377
• EN61000-4-6:1996, Conducted Immunity, 150kHz-80MHz, 3V RMS, 1kHz, 80% AM
• IEC 61000-4-11: 1994, 100% Voltage Dip 0.5 period, 30% Dip 25 periods and >100% Dip 250 periods
Authorized palmOne Representative: David Woo
Manager, palmOne, Inc., World Wide Compliance
Date:
November 4, 2003
Battery Warning
Do not mutilate, puncture, or dispose of batteries in fire. The batteries can burst or explode, releasing
hazardous chemicals. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions and in accordance
with your local regulations.
Warning – Explosion Hazard
• Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Division 2;
• When in hazardous location, turn off power before replacing or wiring modules, and,
• Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be nonhazardous.
Varning
Eksplosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som
rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.
Advarsel!
Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme
fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte batteri tilbage tilleverandøren.
Varoitus
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan valmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
Advarsel
Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri. Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefait av
apparatfabrikanten. Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner.
Waarschuwing!
Bij dit produkt zijn batterijen geleverd. Wanneer deze leeg zijn, moet u ze niet weggooien maar inleveren als
KCA.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
378
Uwaga
Static Electricity, ESD, and your palmOne™ handheld
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can cause damage to electronic devices if discharged into the device, so you
should take steps to avoid such an occurrence.
Description of ESD
Static electricity is an electrical charge caused by the buildup of excess electrons on the surface of a material.
To most people, static electricity and ESD are nothing more than annoyances. For example, after walking over
a carpet while scuffing your feet, building up electrons on your body, you may get a shock -- the discharge
event -- when you touch a metal doorknob. This little shock discharges the built-up static electricity.
ESD-susceptible equipment
Even a small amount of ESD can harm circuitry, so when working with electronic devices, take measures to
help protect your electronic devices, including your palmOne™ handheld, from ESD harm. While palmOne
has built protections against ESD into its products, ESD unfortunately exists and, unless neutralized, could
build up to levels that could harm your equipment. Any electronic device that contains an external entry point
for plugging in anything from cables to docking stations is susceptible to entry of ESD. Devices that you carry
with you, such as your handheld, build up ESD in a unique way because the static electricity that may have
built up on your body is automatically passed to the device. Then, when the device is connected to another
device such as a docking station, a discharge event can occur.
Precautions against ESD
Make sure to discharge any built-up static electricity from yourself and your electronic devices before
touching an electronic device or connecting one device to another. The recommendation from palmOne is
that you take this precaution before connecting your handheld to your computer, placing the handheld in a
cradle, or connecting it to any other device. You can do this in many ways, including the following:
• Ground yourself when you’re holding your mobile device by simultaneously touching a metal surface that
is at earth ground.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
379
• For example, if your computer has a metal case and is plugged into a standard three-prong grounded
outlet, touching the case should discharge the ESD on your body.
• Increase the relative humidity of your environment.
• Install ESD-specific prevention items, such as grounding mats.
Conditions that enhance ESD occurrences
Conditions that can contribute to the buildup of static electricity in the environment include the following:
• Low relative humidity.
• Material type (The type of material gathering the charge. For example, synthetics are more prone to static
buildup than natural fibers like cotton.)
• The rapidity with which you touch, connect or disconnect electronic devices.
While you should always take appropriate precautions to discharge static electricity, if you are in an
environment where you notice ESD events you may want to take extra precautions to protect your electronic
equipment against ESD.
Zire™ 31 Handheld
380
INDEX
SYMBOLS
! (exclamation points) in Tasks list 169
* (asterisk) characters 109
. (period) character 305
NUMERICS
123 button 54
12-hour clock See clock
12-hour formats 303
24-hour clock 301, 302
24-hour formats 302, 303
5-way navigator 19, 23, 33–37
A
abbreviations 307, 308
ABC button 54
accelerating scrolling 35
accented characters 48
accessing
applications 368
dialog boxes 36
features 22, 31
hidden or masked entries 253
information 33, 250
options 37
accessories 17, 98, 174, 348
Acrobat Reader See Adobe Acrobat Reader
actions (pen stroke) 297
activating buttons and controls 305
Add Folder command 280
adding
applications 70, 107, 331
appointments 124
categories 265
connections 318
Zire™ 31 Handheld
contacts 63, 109, 112, 117
expansion cards 98
expense records 194, 196, 197
login scripts 328
memos 172, 173, 174
multi-day events 131
music 206, 209, 218
new locations 340
notes 180, 232
owner information 312
passwords 253, 254, 259
photo albums 233
photos to albums 224, 234
playlists 214–215
reminders 111, 179
repeating events 128, 129
service profiles 321, 322, 325
ShortCut strokes 308
software 26, 27, 98, 276
tasks 158, 160, 162
To Do lists 157
unscheduled events 127
untimed events 126, 131
Addit software 27, 276
add-on applications 284, 371
addresses 110, 326
See also contacts
addressing e-mail 113, 308
Adjust Display dialog box 22, 294
adjusting brightness 22, 292, 294, 356
adjusting speaker volume 311, 319
agenda lists 123
See also Calendar application
Agenda View 143, 149, 150, 151, 168
Agenda View icon 143
Alarm check box 137, 159
alarm clock 137, 159, 334, 343
Alarm icon 145
Alarm Preferences command 344
Alarm Preset settings 154
Alarm Sound pick list 183, 311
alarm tones 344
alarms
See also reminders
adjusting volume for 311
adjusting volume of 344
attaching to notes 183
customizing 159, 169, 183
entering preferences for 153, 154
resetting 138
responding to 344
selecting sounds for 137
setting 137, 159, 184, 343
specifying duration of 154
turning off 344
Album pick list 232
albums See photo albums
alerts 5
See also alarms
aligning screen 310
All category 266
alphabet (Graffiti 2 writing) 44
alphabetic keyboard 23
alternate stroke shapes 306
anniversaries 126, 128
annual events 128
annual tasks 161, 163
application buttons
described 25
location of 19
381
not responding 313
opening applications from 30, 31
reassigning 30, 296
restoring defaults for 296
application controls 23–24, 29
application groups 268, 271
application icons 25, 30, 290, 358
See also application buttons
application title 31
applications
See also specific application
accessing 368
adding contact information to 117, 122
adding files for 70
adding plug-in 331
assigning to buttons 296
beaming 39, 245–246
beaming information in 242
catalog of 276
categorizing 265, 270
categorizing information in 265, 268
changing locations list for 340
checking version numbers for 274
copying 105, 247, 279, 281
deleting categories 267
displaying all 271
displaying categories in 271
displaying information about 17, 274
displaying list of 25, 101, 290
downloading 276, 279, 281
exchanging 107
finding information in 23, 38
importing information from 60
incompatible 371
installation prerequisites for 274
Zire™ 31 Handheld
installing 26, 70, 101, 273, 278
marking private entries in 251
not finding 25, 358, 359
opening 30, 34, 56, 101, 296
organizing 39
overview 29, 273
preinstalled described 25
related topics for 39, 288
removing 106, 284
removing connections for 318
renaming categories 266
running 10
selecting 34
selecting connections for 319
setting preferences for 295, 298
setting primary location for 336
setting secondary locations for 339
soft resets and 357
specifying connections for 316, 318
switching between 31, 101
synchronizing 71, 73, 89, 363
transferring information from 71
transferring to expansion cards 280
transferring to handheld 26
uninstalling 358
updating information for 89
updating third-party 8
upgrading 274
viewing by category 271
viewing transmitted information from
321
appointments
See also Calendar application; events
adjusting for location 298
color-coding 125, 133
combining tasks with 123
displaying 146, 147, 148
entering 53
removing from calendar 140
saving 125
scheduling 124–125
setting alarms for 343
setting duration of 125
setting timeframes for 153
viewing duration of 151
viewing unscheduled time slots for 151
archive folders 62
archived items 62, 140, 167
ascending sort 236
assigned passwords 322
assigning actions to pen stroke 297
asterisk (*) characters 109
attachments 247
Audible Player software 27
audio applications 20, 27, 205
audio files 206, 278
audio formats 206
audio volume 311, 319
authentication servers 331
Auto Lock Handheld option 260
automatically locking handhelds 259, 260
auto-off after interval 356
auto-off delay 315, 358
available storage space 103
B
back panel controls 21
backgrounds
adding photos as 151, 291
adding to calendar 150
382
choosing colors for 295
customizing 151, 291
selecting color of 181
backing up information 8, 26, 71, 98
See also synchronizing
backup cards 98, 106
basics 6, 7, 354
battery
cautions for 378
charging 4, 21, 347, 356, 357
checking 356
conserving power for 294, 313, 356
extending life of 289, 356
overview 5
recharging 4, 5, 315
battery gauge 356
Beam Category command 244
Beam command 243, 245
Beam dialog box 243, 244, 246
Beam From pick list 245
Beam icon 33
beaming 20, 242–246, 315, 370, 371
beaming port See IR port
Birthday icon 145
birthdays 111, 124
blank screen 357
blinking cursor 54
blocking information 252
BMP files 224
bold fonts 293
bottom arrow controls 24
brightness 22, 292, 294, 356
brightness control 22
browsers 321
budgets 194
Zire™ 31 Handheld
built-in applications 25, 284
business applications 276
Business Card command 243
business cards 115, 243
business expenses 195
buttons
activating 305
activating in dialog boxes 36
assigning to applications 296
back panel 21
calculator 190
front panel 19
locking 313
navigator 34, 35, 36, 37
not responding 305, 313, 348, 357
opening applications from 30, 31
reassigning application 30, 296
restoring defaults for 296
selecting dialog box 36
tapping command 24
Buttons Preferences screen 296
C
cables 348
Calculator application
benefits of 189
buttons described 190
categorizing with Expense 265
copying and pasting from 191
displaying calculation history 191
opening 25
re-entering numbers 190
related topics for 192
Calculator icon 25
calculators 25, 27, 189
calendar
See also Calendar application
adding appointments to 124
changing events on 138, 147
changing repeat intervals for 138
color-coding appointments 171
color-coding appointments in 125, 133
customizing 149, 150, 303
displaying appointments for 143, 146,
147, 148
displaying conflicting events in 151
finding overlapping events on 149
opening 155
removing appointments from 140
reserving dates 126
scrolling through 147, 148
selecting dates on 124, 158
setting repeat intervals for 129, 130, 131
Calendar application
applying color-coding options 134, 136
categorizing information in 268
checking schedules in 143, 145, 147, 148
choosing display options 149
defining repeating events 128, 129
deleting categories 267
deleting events 140, 142
displaying categories in 271
entering birthdays for 111
entering event locations from 132
getting help with 155
importing information for 60
installing 25
opening 124
overview 123
related topics for 156
383
rescheduling events 138, 147
running on PCs 155
saving information for 125, 140, 142
scheduling events 124, 126, 131
setting alarms 137, 154
setting alarms from 343, 344
setting display options 150–154
transferring information to 63
troubleshooting 367
Calendar button 19
Calendar icon 25
Calendar Preferences dialog box 137, 153
calendar views 123, 143
calibration 310
Call Waiting 323
calling card numbers 323
camera 98, 224, 226
cancelled actions 36
cancelled tasks 166
capitalization 42, 50, 173
Card Info application 25, 103
card readers 105, 206, 207
carrying cases 98
case sensitivity 38
categories
adding 265
beaming 244
benefits of 264
changing 138
color-coding 133, 134
deleting 267
displaying automatically 290
placing information in different 269
related topics for 272
renaming 266
Zire™ 31 Handheld
scrolling through 271
selecting 244
categorizing
applications 265, 270
contacts 119, 122
events 125, 133, 156, 171, 244
expenses 195, 201, 202, 204
information 264, 268
memos 178
notes 180, 188
tasks 158, 164, 169
Category command 270
Category dialog box 270
category list 34, 101, 136, 151
category marker 144, 151
Category pick list 267, 269
cautions 348, 356
CDs 209
CE Compliance Statement 377
challenge-response prompts 329
Change Repeat dialog box 129, 162
Change your synchronization method option 10
changing
alarms 138
categories 269
category names 266
date and time settings 337
Graffiti 2 ShortCut strokes 309
information 65
location settings 341
locations list 340
memos 174
owner information 312
passwords 255
pen widths 180
playlists 217
preset connections 316
preset formats 302
privacy settings 138
repeating events 139
screen colors 295
screen fonts 292–293
server profiles 322
text colors 151
time zones 341
untimed events 127
World Clock 345
character entry 42, 43, 50, 54, 109
character searches 38
charging battery 347, 356, 357
charging handhelds 4, 21, 315
chat rooms xv
check boxes 24
checking space on handheld 274
checkmarks 24
Choose Date command 158
choosing
alarm sounds 344
alternate stroke shapes 306
available options 24
clock display options 345
communications protocol 326
connections 319, 322
currency options 196, 197, 198
information 19, 65
Internet Service Providers (ISPs) 322
items in lists 35
menu commands 31, 32, 33, 37
music 213, 215
384
photo albums 226, 227, 228, 234
security levels 250
synchronization settings 72
city preferences 299
cleaning your handheld 347
clear button (Calculator) 190
clear entry button (Calculator) 190
Clear Note command 180
clearing Note Pad screens 180
clock 22, 137, 298, 300, 343
See also World Clock
clock display options 345
Clock icon 22, 335
Color Theme Preferences screen 295
color-coding appointments 125, 133
colors
applying to notes 181
changing screen 295
changing text 151
setting background 295
comma-delimited files 60
command buttons 23, 24
command equivalents (Graffiti 2) 32, 49
command letters 32
Command mode 32
Command strokes 32, 33
Command toolbar 33
commands 31, 32, 33, 37
See also menus
comma-separated files 95
communication speed 316, 317, 320
communications protocols 326
compact discs (CDs) 209
completed tasks 165, 166, 167, 169
Compress Day View check box 151
Zire™ 31 Handheld
computers
backing up system information for 71
connecting to 319
copying information to 247
copying photos from 224
entering information with 56
entering network information for 79
managing schedules from 155
overwriting information on 91, 93
preinstalled software for 26
removing Palm Desktop software 285
synchronization options for 86, 88
synchronizing handheld with 69, 70, 71,
72, 84, 366
transferring files from 26
transferring music from 206, 209
updating information from 91, 93
Conduit Settings command 14
conduits 27, 89
conference calls 132
conferences 131
confirmation messages 186
confirmation tones 99
conflicting events 151
conformity declaration 377
connecting
headsets 311
to dial-in servers 322
to Internet 316, 322, 324
to networks 72, 78, 83, 319, 321, 324
to other devices 316, 319
to personal computers 8, 21, 319
to power adapter 21, 315
to power sources 356, 357
Connection pick list 322
Connection Preferences screen 316, 318
connection settings 316–320
connections
adding login scripts for 328
creating 318
deleting 318
disconnecting HotSync cable 75
dropping 326
ending 324
establishing 324, 331
losing 357
precautions for 348, 379
selecting 319, 322
setting flow control for 320
synchronizing with 72, 78, 83
conserving power 294, 313, 356
Contact Details dialog box 119
Contact Edit screen 112, 114
contacts
See also Contracts application
adding 63, 109, 112, 117
attaching to e-mail 247
beaming 244
categorizing 119, 122
copying information for 110
customizing settings for 119
deleting 118
displaying information for 114, 119
duplicating information for 112, 116
entering in memos 173
entering notes for 112
keeping private 119, 122, 251
locating 117
managing 108
transferring from other applications 122
385
Contacts application
adding information 109–111
adding photos 110
archiving information in 118
beaming from 243
categorizing information in 265, 268
copying information 116
creating business cards 115
customizing fields in 114
displaying additional fields for 112
importing information for 60, 95
importing to 122
installing 25
marking entries as private 251
opening 109
overview 108
related topics for 122
saving information in 111, 118
searching from 117
selecting field types for 113
setting display options for 120
transferring information from 63
viewing online help for 121
Contacts button 19
Contacts icon 25
Contacts list 119
continuous events See repeating events
contrast (screen) 22, 292, 294
controls
activating 305
application 23–24, 29
handheld 19–21
locating 39
Copy command 66, 105
Copy dialog box 105
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Copy icon 33
Copy to Card command 237
Copy to Handheld command 237
copying
applications 105, 247, 279, 281
calculations 191
information 66, 98
photos 224–225, 237, 247
service profiles 322
copy-protected applications 105
country information 303
CPUs
backing up system information for 71
connecting to 8, 21, 319
copying information to 247
copying photos from 224
entering information with 56
entering network information for 79
managing schedules from 155
preinstalled software for 26
removing Palm Desktop software 285
synchronization options for 86, 88
synchronizing handheld with 69, 70, 71,
72, 84, 366
transferring files from 26
transferring music from 206, 209
updating information from 91, 93
creating
business cards 115
categories 265
connections 318
contacts 109, 112, 117
expense records 194, 196, 197
login scripts 328
memos 172, 173, 174
multi-day events 131
new locations 340
notes 180, 232
owner information 312
passwords 253, 254, 259
personal calendars 124
photo albums 233
playlists 214–215
plug-in applications 331
reminders 111, 179
repeating events 128, 129
service profiles 321, 322, 325
ShortCut strokes 308
tasks 158, 160, 162
To Do lists 157
unscheduled events 127
untimed events 126, 131
user profiles 12
currency 195, 196, 198
Currency pick list 196
currency symbols 196, 197, 198, 202
current date and time 22, 52, 298, 301, 335
Current Privacy pick list 252
cursor 54, 65
Custom Currencies dialog box 198
customer support xv, 17, 375
customizing
alarms 159, 169, 183
backgrounds 151, 291
calendar 149, 150
contact information 114, 119
currency symbols 198
data entry 304
expense lists 202
Graffiti 2 writing 306
386
handhelds 17, 289
Home screen 290
network settings 321–332
preset formats 303
synchronization settings 86–94
Tasks list 168
customizing handhelds 25
Cut command 67
Cut icon 33
cutting text 66
cycling through calendar views 143
D
daily events 124, 128
daily schedules 145, 146, 149
daily tasks 161, 163
data 285
See also information
data entry 21, 40, 41, 54, 70, 304
databases 27, 60
Date & Time Preferences screen 298, 300
date formats 302, 303
dates
assigning to appointments 124, 128
assigning to repeating tasks 162, 163
changing 138, 194, 337
changing sequence of 303
checking 335
displaying current 22, 339
displaying due 169
displaying in World Clock 345
entering current 52
flagging series of 131
incorrect 358
recording completion 169
Zire™ 31 Handheld
reserving in calendar 126
resetting 300
scheduling reminders for 111
selecting on calendar 124, 158
setting 337
setting alarms for specific 137, 160, 184
setting current 301
setting due 158, 159
setting location-specific 298
setting repeat intervals for 129, 130,
131, 138
sorting by 185
viewing photos by 236
viewing scheduled 143, 146, 147, 148
viewing specific 147
Day View
displaying overlapping events in 149
scheduling events for 124, 126
selecting 124, 145
setting display options for 136, 149, 151
setting timeframes for 153
Day View icon 124
Daylight Savings settings 337, 341
Deactivate Keylock button 313
deadlines 126
decimal separators 303
Default Currency pick list 198
default settings
overwriting 91, 93
restoring 296
selecting 87
Default View pick list 150
Delay command 330
delays 261, 315
Delete command 284
Delete Contact dialog box 118
Delete dialog box 284
Delete Event command 140
Delete Event dialog box 140
Delete From pick list 284
Delete icon 33
Delete Item command 200
Delete Memo command 176
Delete Memo dialog box 176
Delete Note command 186
Delete Photos command 238
Delete Task command 166
Delete Task dialog box 166
deleting
See also removing
categories 267
connections 318
contacts 118
events 140–142
expense records 200, 201
Graffiti 2 ShortCut strokes 309
information 36, 62, 67, 106, 259, 358
locations 342
memos 176
notes 186
passwords 257, 258
photo albums 233
photos 234, 235
playlists 219
preset connections 316
private entries 258
service profiles 327
songs 218
tasks 166–167
descending sort 236
387
description fields 124, 125
deselecting options 24
Desktop overwrites handheld option 91, 93
desktop software 10, 17, 26, 91, 93
See also specific application
Details command 232
Details dialog box 268, 320, 325
Device pick list 274
devices 316, 319
Dial prefix check box 323
dial-in connections 316
dial-in servers 321, 322, 324
dialing in to networks 78, 316
dialing preferences 319
Dialing setting (connections) 319
dialog boxes 24, 36
See also specific
dial-up connections 319, 321
dictionaries 98
digital cameras 98, 224, 226
digitizer (defined) 310
Digitizer Preferences screen 310
Disclaimer statement ii
disconnecting HotSync cable 73, 75, 361
disk space requirements 2, 3
Display icon 22, 294
Display Options command 150, 290
Display Options dialog box 150, 290, 345
display preferences 290, 292, 294, 295
display See screen
displaying
application groups 268
application icons 358, 368
application information 17, 274
applications 101, 271
Zire™ 31 Handheld
calendars 123
Category pick list 151, 152
Command toolbar 33
contact information 114, 119
current date and time 335, 339
current time and date 22
events 136, 152, 153
Graffiti 2 alternate strokes 306
hidden or masked entries 253
Home screen 22, 30, 34
HotSync log 73
information by category 271
items in lists 35
memos 174
menus 22
notes 185
photos 98, 224, 226, 227, 228
schedules 143, 145, 147, 148
song lists 212
space information 274
tasks 143, 151, 164, 165, 168, 169
transmitted information 321
unread messages 143, 151
User’s Guide xiv, xvi
World Clock 345
DNS (defined) 326
DNS addresses 326
do’s and don’ts 347
documentation xiv, 26
domain name system.(DNS) 326
down arrow controls 23
Down button (navigator) 35, 37
downloading
Adobe Acrobat Reader xvi
applications 276, 279, 281
eBooks 27
Palm Desktop software 3
drained batteries 356
drawing freehand 179
drivers 316
drop-down lists See lists
due dates 158, 159, 163, 169
Duplicate Contact command 116
duplicating contact information 112, 116
duration 125
E
eBooks 27
Edit Albums screen 233
Edit Categories command 164, 265, 266,
267
Edit Categories dialog box 134, 135
Edit Connection dialog box 317
Edit currencies command 196
Edit List dialog box 340, 342
Edit menu 66, 67
Edit Playlist dialog box 214
editing 65, 174, 180, 185, 231
electrical discharge 348
electrostatic discharge 379–380
e-mail
addressing 113, 308
attaching information to 247
setting up 322
viewing unread messages for 143, 151
e-mail applications 321, 326
emergency information 265
empty screen 357
Enable Background Playback check box 213
End command 330
388
End User Software License Agreement ii
entering information 21, 40, 41, 70, 304, 312
entry box 23, 24, 54
eraser 180
error messages 364
errors xiv
ESD (electrostatic discharge) 379–380
Essential Software folder 277
Event Details dialog box 138
events
See also appointments
adjusting for location 298
archiving 140, 141, 142
assigning color-codes to 136
attaching to e-mail 247
beaming 156, 244
categorizing 125, 133, 156, 171, 244
changing descriptions 138
changing untimed 127
conflicting 151
contact information and 111
creating multi-day 131
creating untimed 126, 131
defined 124
defining repeating 128, 129
deleting 140–142
displaying 136, 152, 153
entering notes for 132, 133
extending beyond midnight 131
finding overlapping 149
marking as private 125, 156
rescheduling 138–139, 147
scheduling 124, 126, 153
setting alarms for 137, 154
sharing 156
Zire™ 31 Handheld
types of 124
viewing free time for 151
viewing specific time for 152
exchanging
applications 107
expansion cards 107
information 20, 28
records 171
exclamation points (!) in Tasks list 169
expansion card slot 20, 356
expansion cards
adding applications to 107
battery life and 356
beaming from 245
benefits of 98
copying applications to 105, 247
deleting information on 106
displaying information about 25, 103
finding information on 38
formatting 106
getting applications on 274
inserting 20, 99
limitations 103
moving applications to 280
opening applications on 101
opening files on 102
overview 97
preventing damage to 100
related topics for 107
removing 100
removing applications on 284
renaming 104
transferring audio files to 206–212
transferring desktop software to 26
transferring photos to 224, 237
types of 98
viewing applications on 101
Expense application
archiving information in 200
categorizing information in 265
categorizing with Calculator 265
changing information 194
choosing currency options 196
customizing currency symbols 198
customizing expense list 202
deleting categories 267
deleting information in 200–201
entering expenses in 194–195
getting help with 203
opening 194, 203
overview 193
presetting currency symbols 197
related topics for 204
saving information in 195
synchronizing information for 71
transferring information to 63
Expense icon 25
Expense Preferences dialog box 194, 197
expense records 194, 196, 197, 200
expense reports 25, 196, 201, 202
Expense type pick list 194
external devices 316
external files 95
external speaker 311
F
fade setting 151, 291
FAQs 354
FCC Statement 376
features 22, 31
389
fields 112, 113, 114
File Link feature 95
file linking 17
file names 105
file types 278
files
attaching to e-mail 247
displaying 103
displaying HotSync log 73
installation prerequisites for 274
installing 70
installing on handheld 278, 279, 280,
281
opening 102
removing 106
removing from handheld 62
restoring archived 62
sending information to 247
synchronizing with external 95
transferring to handheld 26, 60
troubleshooting uninstalled 364
filing events 125
finances 27, 193, 265
Find dialog box 23, 38
Find icon 22, 23
Find More button 38
finding
contacts 117
information 23, 38
overlapping events 149
photos 227
flow control (connections) 320
Flow Ctl pick list 320
folders 280, 362
Font command 293
Zire™ 31 Handheld
font styles 293
fonts 292–293
forgetting passwords 258
Format Card command 106
formats
audio files 206
image files 224
information-specific 302
Formats Preferences screen 302
formatting expansion cards 106
freehand drawing 179
freeing up space 62, 142, 284, 358
frequently asked questions 354
front panel controls 19
frozen screen 21, 348, 349, 357
full-screen pen stroke 294, 297
full-screen writing 180
full-screen writing area 304, 305
G
Game Sound pick list 311
games 27, 98, 268, 276, 311
gestures (Graffiti 2 writing) 49
Get IP command 330
Getting Started Guide 26
GIF files 224
Go To Date dialog box 124, 126
GPRS command 330
GPRS mobile phones 316
Graffiti 2 Preferences screen 306
Graffiti 2 writing
changing strokes for 309
choosing input area for 304
copying and pasting with 66
creating tasks with 158
deleting information with 67
deleting ShortCuts 309
entering commands with 32, 49
entering information with 42–51
entering ShortCut strokes for 52–53,
307
getting help with 48
guidelines for 43
overview 41
setting alternate stroke shapes for 306
setting preferences for 304–309
troubleshooting problems with 359
GSM mobile phones 316
H
handheld-based software catalog 276
handhelds
accessing features 22, 31
adding applications to 70
adding software to 26, 27, 98, 276
beaming to 242
benefits of 18
charging 4, 21, 315
checking space on 274
connecting to other devices 316
connecting to PCs 8, 21
connecting to power adapter 21, 315
controls described 19–21
copying photos to 224, 237
customizing 17, 25, 289
disconnecting from HotSync cable 73,
75, 361
displaying all applications on 271
do’s and don’ts 347
freeing up space on 62, 142, 284, 358
390
getting additional information about xv
getting help with 374
getting unexpected results 310
installing additional applications 276,
278
installing information on multiple 7, 11
locking 259–262, 312
losing 312
maintaining 347
maintenance information for 28
not responding 313, 348, 356, 357, 358,
366
opening 356
overview 18
playing music on 205, 213, 216
preinstalled software on 25
recharging 347, 356
reconnecting HotSync cable 75
removing items 62
replacing information on 91, 93
resetting 21, 259, 300, 348, 357
restoring information on 351
running out of space on 98
setting auto-off delay for 315
setting idle timeouts for 326
setting power preferences for 313–315
setting up 1, 6, 17
synchronizing 8, 69–85, 258
system requirements for 2
timing out 362
troubleshooting 310, 354
turning itself off 358
turning on accidentally 313
turning on and off 6, 19, 30, 259
upgrading 4, 7
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Handmark Mobile DB software 27
Handmark PDA Money software 27
Handmark Solitaire software 27
handwriting 359
hard resets 259, 300, 350, 351, 357
headphone jack 20, 348
headphones 348
headsets 20, 311, 348
help xv, 17, 24, 48, 374
Help menu 361
Hide Private Records option 252
hiding
currency symbols 202
private entries 250, 252
highlighting menu commands 37
See also selection highlight
high-speed data services 321
hints 24, 254, 258
History dialog box 191
Holiday Files folder 155
holidays 126, 128, 130
Home icon 22, 30
Home screen
customizing 290
displaying 22, 30, 34
displaying icons on 358, 368
moving around 34
opening applications on 30–31
opening category list on 101
returning to 34
selecting applications on 25, 34
viewing application list for 25
hosts 326
HotSync cable 319
connecting to networks with 78
connecting to PCs with 8, 21
disconnecting 73, 75, 361
reconnecting 75
synchronizing with 72, 73, 79
HotSync icon 22, 23, 296
HotSync log 73
HotSync Manager
infrared option missing 365
not responding 363
restoring information from 351
starting 87
synchronizing and 72
turning off 87
HotSync Manager icon 72, 361
HotSync menu 282
HotSync Online Troubleshooting Guide 361
HotSync software 25, 72
how-to information xiv
I
ICES Statement 377
icons 22, 25, 33, 290, 296, 358
idle timeouts 326
image files 224, 278
images See photos
importing
contacts 122
information 12, 60, 95
incompatible applications 371
incorrect dates and time 358
Info command 274
Info dialog box 274
information
accessing 33, 250
backing up 8, 26, 71, 98
391
beaming 242–246
categorizing 264, 268
caution for hard resets and 350
changing 65
changing categories for 269
combining in different categories 266
copying and pasting 66
creating user-specific 11–16
defining abbreviations for 307, 308
deleting 36, 62, 67, 106, 259, 358
displaying 19, 23
duplicating 116
entering 21, 40, 41, 70, 304, 312
importing 60, 95
importing to profiles 12
keeping private 249, 251
losing xiv, 5, 71, 356
managing 26
moving through 19
not finding 360
organizing 39, 264
password-protecting 253, 254, 255, 257
receiving from outside sources 17
related topics for 68, 248, 263
restoring 258, 259, 351
saving 31, 62, 360
searching for 23, 38
selecting 19, 65
setting up multiple handhelds for 7
sharing 20, 28, 110, 172, 241, 247
synchronization guidelines for 71
tracking 27
transferring to expansion cards 247
updating 8, 56, 69, 70
upgrades and saving 7
Zire™ 31 Handheld
viewing by category 271
viewing transmitted 321
infrared option 365, 366
infrared port See IR port
initialization strings (modems) 320
input area 19, 22, 42, 304
inserting expansion cards 20, 99
installation CD 2, 26, 276, 354
installation prerequisites 274
installing
additional software 26, 276, 278
applications 26, 70, 101, 273, 278
files 70
folders 280
mobile databases 27
Palm Desktop software 3, 7
instant messenger (IM) accounts 113
Int’l button 55
interactive tutorial 7
international keyboard 55
Internet connections 316, 322, 324
Internet protocol (IP) 326
Internet Service Providers (ISPs) 316, 321,
322
invalidating warranty 356
IP Address check box 326
IP addresses 326
IR devices 74
IR port
beaming from 242, 243, 244
connecting to networks with 78
creating connections for 316
disabling 77
location of 20
selecting connections for 319
synchronizing with 72, 74, 75, 79, 365
IR to a PC/Handheld connection 316, 317
IR-enabled laptop 74
ISP accounts 321
J
JPG files 224
K
key terms xv
keyboard icons 23
keyboard shortcuts 32
keyboards
connecting to portable 174
entering information with 54, 55
opening alternative 55
types of 23
Keylock 19, 313, 314
Keylock Preferences screen 313, 356
keys (onscreen keyboard) 55
L
LANSync Prefs dialog box 85
laptops 74
large fonts 293
left arrow controls 23
Left button (navigator) 34, 35, 37
letter keyboard 54
Letter keyboard icon 23
letter selection 30
License Agreement ii
lightning bolt icon 357
Limitation of Liability statement ii
line selection 65
linking to outside sources 17
392
links (documentation) xv
List icon 227
list screens 35
List view 227, 236, 238
listening to music 20, 98, 205, 206, 209
lists
creating To Do 157
customizing expense 202
displaying applications icons in 290
displaying song 212
finding items in 340
moving between items in 35, 37
rearranging items in 175
selecting items in 23, 24, 35
loading user profiles 15, 16
Local Area Networks See networks
locating
contacts 117
controls 39
information 23, 38
overlapping events 149
photos 227
Location field 132
Location pick list 299, 340
location settings (World Clock) 336, 339,
341
locations, deleting 342
location-specific preferences 298–303
Lock Handheld dialog box 260
lock options 261
locking
handheld buttons 313
handhelds 259–262, 312
locks 105, 245
log files 73
Zire™ 31 Handheld
logging in to network servers 328
Login Script dialog box 328, 329
login scripts 328–331
Look Up line (Contacts) 117
losing handheld 312
losing information xiv, 5, 71, 356
losing passwords 258, 259
Lost Password button 258
low batteries 356
low battery 5
lowercase letters 43, 305
M
Mac applications 26, 27, 58
Mac information
creating contacts 121
creating notes 187
creating user profiles 13
described xiv
handheld system requirements 3
installing RealOne Mobile Player 207
installing software 7, 277, 281–283
listening to music 207
opening calendars 155
opening tasks 170
synchronization options for 88, 92
synchronizing handheld 71, 76
synchronizing with user profiles 16
troubleshooting problems 354
turning off IR port 77
uninstalling Palm Desktop software 286
viewing photos 225, 239
writing memos 177
Mac OS X systems 281
magnifying glass (Adobe Reader) xvi
maintenance 347
maintenance information 28
Make Default check box 94
Manual synchronization option 87
manually locking handhelds 259, 262
marking information as private 251
Mask Private Records option 252
masking private entries 250, 252, 253
math calculators 25, 27, 189
MCI connections 323
media formats 206
memory 284, 358
memory button (Calculator) 190
memory cards 106, 205, 226
memory clear button (Calculator) 190
memory recall button (Calculator) 190
memos
See also notes; Memos application
adding contact information to 117, 173
attaching to e-mail 247
beaming 244
categorizing 178
creating 172, 173, 174
deleting 176
displaying 174
editing 174, 175
keeping private 178, 251
organizing 175, 178
saving 173, 176
sharing 178
transferring to PCs 175
Memos application
categorizing information in 265
changing memos in 174
deleting memos 176
393
getting help with 177
importing information for 60, 95
installing 25
marking entries as private 251
opening 173, 296
overview 172
related topics for 178
reordering memos lists 175
selecting memos 174
transferring information to 63
troubleshooting 367
writing memos with 173
Memos icon 25
Memos list 173, 174, 175
menu bar 31
Menu icon 22, 31, 359
menus 22, 31, 37
messages
displaying unread e-mail 143, 151
removing confirmation 186
responding to 344
Microsoft Outlook See Outlook
Microsoft Windows systems See Windows
information
Microsoft Word application 175
Mini-USB connector icon 21
missing applications 25, 358, 359
missing icons 358
mobile databases 27
mobile phones 78, 316, 321
Modem Sync Prefs dialog box 80
modems 78, 316, 319, 320, 322
money applications 27
Money category 265
money See currency
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Month View 136, 148, 149, 152
Month View icon 148
month, setting 301, 337
monthly events 128
monthly schedules 148
monthly tasks 161, 163
moving photos 235
moving through documentation xvi
MP3 files 206
multi-day events 131
multi-line descriptions 124
multimedia applications 268
MultiMediaCard expansion cards 98, 205
music
changing playlists for 217
creating playlists for 214–215
deleting playlists for 219
displaying playlists for 212
listening to 20, 98, 205, 206, 209
playing 205, 213, 216
related topics for 222
removing from playlists 218
saving 210
selecting 213, 215
stopping 213
storing 98
viewing details 220
music files 205, 206
N
names See usernames
naming
connections 319
expansion cards 104
photo albums 233
playlists 214
user profiles 12, 13
navigating through documentation xvi
navigational controls 23
navigator 19, 23, 33–37
navigator buttons 34, 35, 36, 37
negative numbers 190
Network Preferences dialog box 81
Network Preferences screen 321, 324, 325,
327, 328
network settings 321–332
networks
creating login scripts for 328–331
deleting service profiles for 327
dialing in to 78, 316
losing connections to 357
selecting communications protocol for
326
setting IP addresses for 326
setting service for 81
setting up service profiles for 321, 322
synchronizing with 72, 78, 83, 319, 321,
324
new lines 173
New Profile screen 12, 13
next arrow 23
Note Pad
See also notes
categorizing information in 265, 269
clearing 180
creating notes from 180
deleting notes in 186
displaying notes in 185
getting help with 187
installing 25
394
opening 180
overview 179
related topics for 188
selecting pens 182
setting alarms in 183
setting color preferences 181–182
troubleshooting 368
Note Pad icon 25
notes
See also memos
adding to photos 232
attaching alarms to 183
categorizing 180, 188
creating 180
deleting 186
editing 180, 185
marking as private 180, 188
saving 180
selecting 185
setting background colors for 182
sorting 185
No-time icon 144
number formats 204, 302, 303
number keyboard 54
Number keyboard icon 23
numbers 45, 54, 190, 305
numeric keyboard 23
O
omitting passwords 322
Online Troubleshooting Guide 361
onscreen keyboards See keyboards
opening
applications 30, 34, 56, 101, 296
calendars 155
Zire™ 31 Handheld
category list 34
category pick list 101
dialog boxes 24
files 102
handheld 356
handheld menus 31
Home screen 30
masked entries 253
Note Pad 180
onscreen keyboards 23, 54, 55
RealOne Mobile Player 221
operating systems 2
optional information xiv
options 24, 36, 37, 86
See also preferences; security options
organizing
applications 39
information 39, 264
Outlook 10, 56, 90, 165, 285, 362
Overdue task icon 144
overdue tasks 143, 151, 164, 169
overlapping events 149
owner information 312
Owner Preferences screen 312
P
paging through documentation xvi
Palm Desktop software
completing repeated tasks and 165
defined 2
entering information in 56, 57, 59
importing information to 60, 62
installing 7, 26
online help for 56
opening applications in 56, 58
requiring password entry for 255
restoring archived items to 62
synchronizing information with 70, 71
system requirements for 2
troubleshooting 354
uninstalling 285
Palm OS handhelds 28
Palm Quick Install icon 279
Palm Quick Install window 280
Palm Reader 27
palmOne Photos See Photos application
palmOne Quick Install software 26, 70, 278,
364
parts (handheld) 2
Password screen 254
passwords
changing 255
creating 254, 259
deleting 257, 258
entering 322, 325
forgetting 258
locking handhelds with 259, 312
losing 259
omitting 322
overview 253
requiring 255
security options for 250
tracking 27
troubleshooting 369
Paste command 66
Paste icon 33
pasting information 66, 191
patches 284
PCs See personal computers
PDAs 18
395
pen 181, 294
Pen selector 180
pen widths 180
percentage button (Calculator) 190
performance 347
period (.) character 305
peripheral devices 20
personal computers
backing up system information for 71
connecting to 8, 21, 319
copying information to 247
copying photos from 224
entering information with 56
entering network information for 79
managing schedules from 155
overwriting information on 91, 93
preinstalled software for 26
removing Palm Desktop software 285
synchronization options for 86, 88
synchronizing handheld with 69, 70, 71,
72, 84, 366
transferring files from 26
transferring music from 206, 209
personal digital assistants (PDAs) 18
personal information 253
personalizing contact information 114
personalizing handheld 1, 17
phone drivers 316
Phone Lookup 63, 117
phone numbers 63, 113, 117, 179, 265, 325
phone settings 322
phones 316, 319, 321
See also conference calls
photo albums
adding photos 224, 234
Zire™ 31 Handheld
creating 233
deleting 233
moving photos between 232, 235
organizing photos in 233, 235
removing photos 234, 235, 238
renaming 233
scrolling through 232
searching 227
selecting 226, 227, 228, 234
sorting photos in 236
Photo Details screen 232, 238
photos
adding to albums 224, 234
adding to contacts 109, 110
adding to slide shows 228
adjusting fade setting for 291
attaching notes to 232
beaming 244
copying 224–225, 237, 247
deleting 234, 235
displaying 224, 226, 227, 228
finding 227
moving 232, 235
organizing 233
renaming 232
rotating 229
saving 233
selecting as backgrounds 151, 291
sharing 224, 240
sorting 236
storing 98, 102
viewing 98
viewing by dates 236
viewing details 232
Photos application
categorizing information in 265
copying photos 237
creating photo albums 233
deleting photos 238
displaying photos from 226, 227
getting help with 239
installing 26, 109, 290
moving photos 235
opening 226, 239
overview 223
related topics for 240
rotating photos 229
sorting photos 236
storing files for 102
synchronizing information for 71
transferring photos with 224
troubleshooting 368
viewing photo details 231
viewing slide shows 228
Photos icon 26
pick lists 23, 24, 37
See also lists
pictures See photos
playback 368
playing music 205, 213, 216
playlists
creating 214
deleting songs on 218
displaying 212
editing 217
naming 214
removing 219
reordering music on 218
selecting music from 213, 216
396
troubleshooting 369
plug-in applications 331
portable keyboards 174
ports 20, 21
power adapter 21, 347, 357
Power button 19
power button 5, 19
power connector 21
power consumption options 314
power preferences 313–315
Power Preferences screen 314
powerOne Calculator 27
power-saving settings 314, 315
PRC applications 331
precautions 348, 356, 379
predefined service profiles 325
preferences 289, 333
Preferences command 153
Prefs icon 25
preinstalled applications 25, 284
prerequisites xv
preset connections 316, 318
preset delays 261
preset formats 302
previous arrow 23
Previous View icon (Acrobat Reader) xvi
Previous View icon (Adobe Reader) xvi
primary location 336, 337, 342, 345
Primary PC Setup command 79
printing
expense reports 25
online documentation xvi
prioritizing tasks 158, 169
privacy FAGs 369
privacy levels 252
Zire™ 31 Handheld
privacy settings
applications 39
calendar 156
changing 138
contacts 122
information 250
memos 178
notes 188
tasks 171
Private check box 251
profiles 11–16
programs See software; applications
Prompt command 330
prompts 329
protecting information 71, 98, 249, 251, 259
protecting your handheld 347
punctuation marks 43, 46
Punctuation Shift indicator 50
Punctuation Shift stroke 50, 305
Purge Categories dialog box 201
Purge command 142, 167, 201
Purge dialog box 142, 167
purging items 358
Q
quarterly tasks 162
Query DNS check box 326
questions and answers 354
Quick Install icon 206, 279
Quick Install software 26, 70, 278, 364
Quick Install window 280
Quick Look Up icon 117
Quick Look Up line 117
Quick Tour 6, 25
R
RealOne icon 213
RealOne Mobile Player
accessing CDs from 209
adding song lists 214
compatible formats for 206
deleting playlists 219
displaying song details 220
editing playlists 217
getting help with 211, 214, 221, 222
installing 27, 206, 207
opening 221
opening files for 102
overview 205
playing songs from 216
setting period of inactivity for 213
starting 213
troubleshooting 368
turning off 213
reassigning application buttons 30, 296
reboots See resetting handheld
Receipt Details dialog box 196
recharging handhelds 4, 5, 315, 347, 356
recipes 176
reconnecting HotSync cable 75
Record menu 243
record screens 35
recording network information 79
records
deleting expense 200, 201
entering information in 110
getting number of 275
hard resets and 350
moving between 35
setting privacy levels for 252
397
sorting 122, 178, 202
specifying as first 109
recovering memory 358
recurring events 124
regulatory information 376
related features (handheld) xv
related items 265
related topics xv
Remember Last Category check box 290
reminders
canceling 344
creating 179
scheduling 111, 124
setting alarms as 343
specifying notes as 183
remote access 78, 321
removing
See also deleting
application connections 318
applications 106, 284
appointments from calendars 140
cancelled tasks 166
completed tasks 167
confirmation messages 186
expansion cards 100
files from handheld 62
information on expansion cards 106
old events 140, 142
Palm Desktop software 285
photos from albums 234, 235, 238
repeating tasks 166
selection highlight 34, 35
unused information 358
Rename Card dialog box 104
Rename Custom Fields dialog box 114
Zire™ 31 Handheld
renaming
categories 266
expansion cards 104
photo albums 233
photos 232
preset connections 316
Repeat icon 145
repeat intervals 128, 131, 161, 163
repeating events
changing 139
deleting 140, 141
displaying 152
scheduling 128, 129
repeating tasks 160, 162, 165, 166
required steps xiv
rescheduling events 138–139, 147
reserving dates 126
Reset button 21
reset button 348, 349, 350
resetting
alarms 138
application buttons 296
clock 300, 337
Graffiti 2 ShortCut strokes 309
handheld 21, 259, 300, 357
handhelds 348, 357
local preferences 298, 300
passwords 255
preset connections 316
preset formats 302
screen fonts 293
server profiles 322
speaker volume 311
resizing text 174
restoring archived items 62
restoring defaults 296
restoring information 258, 259, 351
restrictions 348, 356
right arrow controls 23
Right button (navigator) 34, 35, 37
rotary dialing 319
Rotate Photo command 230
Rotate Photo dialog box 230
rotating photos 229
running out of memory 284
running out of space 98
S
saving
appointments 125
battery power 313
contacts 111, 118
information 31, 62, 360
memos 173, 176
music files 205, 210
notes 180
photos 233
synchronization settings 92, 94
tasks 158, 166, 167
schedules 123, 143, 151, 298
See also appointments; calendar
scheduling
appointments 124–125
backup and synchronization 71
events 124, 126, 153
reminders 111, 124
repeating tasks 160, 162
untimed events 127
scheduling conflicts 123
398
screen
See also Home screen
adding photos as backgrounds 151, 291
adjusting brightness 22, 292, 294, 356
aligning 310
blank 357
caring for 347
caution for writing on 21
changing colors of 295
changing fonts for 292–293
clearing 180
displayed 19
frozen 21, 348, 349, 357
inserting selection highlight 34
maintaining 347
moving through 19, 23, 33
not responding 21
overview 22
setting input area for 304
writing areas on 19, 42, 44, 48
scripts 331
scroll bar 24
scrolling
accelerating 35
application categories 34
from screen-to-screen 24
letter selection versus 30
list screens 35
menu lists 37
record screens 35
to dates 124
SD memory cards 98, 205, 226
SDIO accessories 98
SDIO expansion cards 98
searching for information 23, 38, 117
Zire™ 31 Handheld
secondary locations 339, 342, 345
Secure Digital input/output (SDIO) 98
security 322
security levels 250
security options 250
applications 39
calendar 156
contacts 122
memos 178
notes 188
tasks 171
Security Preferences dialog box
changing passwords 255
creating passwords 254
deleting passwords 257, 258
locking handhelds 260, 262, 312
masking private entries 252
Select a Color Theme dialog box 295
Select button (navigator) 34, 35, 36, 37
Select Colors dialog box 181
Select Font dialog box 293
Select User dialog box 8, 72
selecting
alarm sounds 344
alternate stroke shapes 306
available options 24
clock display options 345
communications protocol 326
connections 319, 322
currency options 196, 197, 198
information 19, 65
Internet Service Providers (ISPs) 322
items in lists 35
menu commands 31, 32, 33, 37
music 213, 215
photo albums 226, 227, 228, 234
security levels 250
synchronization settings 72
selection highlight 34, 35
selection tool 347
self-help resources 374
Send command 330
Send CR command 330
Send Password command 330
Send to Handheld dialog box 281
Send To Handheld droplet 26, 207, 281
Send to Handheld droplet 225
Send To Palm Quick Install command 279
Send User ID command 330
Serial Port drop-down box 366
Service Connection Progress messages 324
Service pick list 322, 325
service profiles
deleting 327
selecting 324
setting up 321, 322, 325
service templates 321
services 316, 329
Set Alarm dialog box 159, 184
Set as default check box 92
Set Country dialog box 303
Set Date & Time button 337
Set Date dialog box 301, 337
Set Time dialog box 125, 301, 338
setting alarms 137, 159, 184, 343
setting up handhelds 1, 6, 17
settings See preferences
setup 354
sharing
events 156
399
information 20, 28, 110, 172, 241, 247
memos 178
photos 224, 240
usernames, caution for 71
sharing FAQs 370
ShortCut strokes (Graffiti 2 writing)
backing up 307
changing 309
deleting 309
described 52–53
setting up 307
ShortCut Text line 308
shortcuts xv, 24, 32, 66, 297
ShortCuts Preferences screen 307, 309
Show History command 191
Show Multiple Locations setting 345
Show Private Records dialog box 253
Show Private Records option 252
side panel controls 21
sidebars xv
Silent profile 311
sketching 179
Slide Show Delay pick list 228
slide shows 226, 228, 235, 236
slider 23
small fonts 293
small icons 290
Snooze setting 344
soft resets 348, 357
software
See also specific application
adding 26, 27, 98, 276
downloading 17
downloading trial versions of 276
installing 25, 26, 70, 276, 278
Zire™ 31 Handheld
updating 10
software catalog 276
Solitaire 27
Song Details command 220
Song Details dialog box 220
song lists
creating 214
deleting 219
displaying 212
editing 217
naming 214
removing items on 218
reordering music on 218
selecting items 213, 216
troubleshooting 369
songs 98, 205
See also music
Sort by pick list 185
sorting 122, 178, 185, 202, 236
sound files See audio files; music files
sound preferences 311
sounds 137, 154, 169, 344
See also music
Sounds & Alerts Preferences 311
space characters 307, 322
space information (handheld) 274
speaker 21, 311, 319
special characters 43, 50, 51, 305
specifications 377
speed (communications) 316, 317, 320
Speed pick list 317, 320
Splash Money application 27
spreadsheets 60, 195
square root button (Calculator) 190
starting
HotSync Manager 87
locked handhelds 259
Outlook applications 90
RealOne Player 213
static electricity 348, 379–380
stopping
information searches 38
playback 213
slide shows 229
storage 97, 98
storing MP3 files 206
stylus 21, 42, 347
switching between applications 31, 101
symbols 50, 51, 54, 109, 305
synchronization settings 72, 86–94
synchronization software 89, 285
synchronize (defined) 8
synchronizing
caution for 285
handhelds 8, 69–85, 258
installing applications and 278, 279
over networks 78, 83
prerequisites for 71, 78
troubleshooting problems with 73, 361–
366
with external files 95
with HotSync cable 73, 79
with IR port 72, 74, 75, 79, 365
with Microsoft Outlook 56, 70, 362
with user profiles 11, 14
system information 71
system requirements 2
System Sound pick list 311
400
T
tab-delimited files 60
tapping 305, 310, 347, 348, 357, 359
tapping command buttons 24
Task application
saving information in 158
setting alarms 159
Task Preferences dialog box 159, 168
tasks
See also Tasks application
adding contact information to 117
adding notes to 158
adding to Tasks list 168
archiving 166, 167
assigning due dates to 158, 159, 163
attaching to e-mail 247
categorizing 158, 164, 169
changing date due 169
combining with appointments 123
completing 165
creating 158
deleting 166–167
displaying 143, 151, 164, 165, 168, 169
managing 157
marking as private 158
organizing 164
prioritizing 158, 169
reordering 169
saving 158, 166, 167
scheduling repeating 160, 162
setting alarms for 159, 169
setting repeat intervals for 161, 163
viewing due dates for 169
viewing overdue 169
Zire™ 31 Handheld
Tasks application
adding tasks 158, 160, 162
additional information for 171
categorizing information in 265
getting help with 170
importing information for 60
installing 25
marking completed tasks 165
opening 158
overview 157
removing tasks 166, 167
saving information for 167
securing contents 171
setting display options for 164
setting preferences for 168–169
transferring information to 63
troubleshooting 369
Tasks icon 25
Tasks list 143, 164, 166, 168
TCP/IP Settings button 84
technical assistance xv, 17, 375
Technical Support office 375
technical terms xv
telephone numbers See phone numbers
text
adjusting fade setting for 291
changing color of 151, 295
changing screen fonts for 292
copying and pasting 66
entering 41, 42, 54
entering abbreviations for 307, 308
resizing 174
searching for 38
selecting 38, 65
viewing against photos 151
text files 60, 95
third-party applications 8, 357, 371, 372
thousands separator 303
Thumbnail icon 226
Thumbnail view 226, 238
thumbnails (photos) 151, 226, 238, 291
time
blocking out periods of 128, 131
changing 337
checking 335
displaying current 22, 339
displaying free 151
displaying specific periods of 151
entering current 52
entering display options for 153
incorrect 358
resetting 138, 300
scheduling periods of 125
setting 337
setting current 301
setting for alarms 137, 160, 184
setting location-specific 25, 298
unscheduled events and 127
time bars 151
time formats 302, 303
time zones 298, 299, 339, 341
timed events 152
times
setting for alarms 343
tips xv, 17
Tips icon 23, 24
To Do lists 157
See also tasks
toolbars 33
top arrow controls 24
401
top panel controls 20
touch-sensitive screen See screen
TouchTone dialing 319
tracking
expenses 25, 193
information 27
transfer options 352
transferring audio files 206–212
transferring information 60, 63, 71
travel expenses 202
travel guides 98
trial software 276
troubleshooting 73, 310, 354
turning handheld on and off 6, 19, 30, 259,
313, 315
turning off alarms 344
turning off HotSync Manager 87
turning sounds off 311
tutorial 7
U
Undo icon 33
Unfiled category 266
Unfiled category (Photos) 234
unfiled items 244
unfreezing handheld 348, 350, 357
uninstalling Palm Desktop software 285
unread e-mail messages 143, 151
unscheduled events 127
untimed events 111, 126, 127, 131, 152
up arrow controls 23
Up button (navigator) 35, 37
updating
application information 89
information 8, 56, 69, 70
Zire™ 31 Handheld
owner information 312
software 10
third-party applications 8
upgrades 4, 7, 274
uppercase letters 42, 43, 305
USB port 8, 21, 73
Use calling card check box 323
user profiles 11–16
User’s Guide xiv, xvi, 374
usernames 11, 71, 322, 325, 350
searching for 117
Users folder 285
user-specific information 11
V
vacations 131
version numbers 274, 275
video 232
View By pick list 290
View Log command 73
viewing
application groups 268
application icons 358, 368
application information 17, 274
applications 101, 271
calendars 123
Category pick list 151, 152
Command toolbar 33
contact information 114, 119
current date and time 335, 339
current time and date 22
events 136, 152, 153
Graffiti 2 alternate strokes 306
hidden or masked entries 253
Home screen 22, 30, 34
HotSync log 73
information by category 271
items in lists 35
memos 174
menus 22
notes 185
photos 98, 224, 226, 227, 228
schedules 143, 145, 147, 148
song lists 212
space information 274
tasks 143, 151, 164, 165, 168, 169
transmitted information 321
unread messages 143, 151
User’s Guide xiv, xvi
World Clock 345
views in Calendar 123, 143
virus-scanning software 354
volume 311, 319, 344
Volume setting (connections) 319
W
Wait For command 329
Wait For Prompt command 329
Waiting for sender message 366
warnings 358, 378
warranty 356
web browsers 321
web services 316
web sites xv, 17
week days 303
Week View 147, 149, 153
Week View icon 147
weekly events 128
weekly schedules 147, 149
weekly tasks 161, 163
402
Windows applications 26, 27, 56
Windows information
creating contacts 121
creating login scripts 328
creating notes 187
creating user profiles 12
described xiv
entering expense reports 203
handheld system requirements 2
HotSync cable connections 75
importing 60
installing software 7, 276, 278–280
listening to music 206, 209
opening calendars 155
opening tasks 170
restoring information 351
switching applications 10
synchronization options for 86, 90
synchronizing handheld 71, 74, 78, 95
synchronizing with user profiles 14
troubleshooting problems 354
uninstalling Palm Desktop software 285
viewing photos 224, 239
writing memos 177
wireless connections 72
wireless service providers 321
Word documents 175
word selection 65
World Clock 137, 298, 334, 343, 345
World Clock icon 25, 335
Writing Area Preferences screen 304
writing areas 19, 42, 44, 48
writing in your own handwriting 179
writing tool 21, 347
Zire™ 31 Handheld
writing with Graffiti 2 characters 32, 41, 52,
305
Y
year, selecting 301, 337
yearly events 128
yearly tasks 161, 163
Z
ZIP files 364
Zire handhelds See handhelds
403
Download PDF

advertising